Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WR37660
HTR-6280
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Caution-i En
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications
not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,
granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2 IMPORTANT:
When connecting this product to accessories
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users
manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other
electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is
found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Caution-ii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to
set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet in the main room.
19
The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
21 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the
same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are
incorrectly replaced.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very
small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Features.................................................................... 2
About this manual................................................... 3
Supplied accessories................................................ 3
Part names and functions....................................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Rear panel .................................................................. 5
Front panel display..................................................... 6
Remote control........................................................... 7
Quick start guide..................................................... 8
L
Preparing remote control ....................................... 9
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9
Using the remote control............................................ 9
Connections ........................................................... 10
Placing speakers....................................................... 10
Connecting speakers ................................................ 11
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14
Connecting other components ................................. 15
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 17
Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 18
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 18
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18
Connecting the power cable..................................... 19
Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 19
Optimizing the speaker setting for your
listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 20
Using Auto Setup..................................................... 20
When an error message is displayed during
measurement ........................................................ 22
When a warning message is displayed after
measurement ........................................................ 22
Playback................................................................. 23
Basic procedure........................................................ 23
Using the SCENE function ...................................... 23
Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 24
Muting audio output................................................. 24
Adjusting high/low frequency sounds
(tone control) ....................................................... 24
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 24
Using your headphones............................................ 25
Displaying input signal information ........................ 25
Changing information on the front panel display .... 25
Enjoying the sound field programs ..................... 26
Selecting sound field programs................................ 26
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decode mode)........................................ 29
Enjoying sound field programs without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 29
Enjoy sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 29
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 29
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 30
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station
(Frequency tuning) .............................................. 30
Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset
tuning).................................................................. 30
Using HD Radio™ features
(U.S.A. model only) ........................................... 32
Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 32
Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 32
Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 33
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning
(U.S.A. model only) ........................................... 34
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 34
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 34
XM Satellite Radio
®
operations ............................. 35
Registering XM Satellite Radio channels ................ 36
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™
information .......................................................... 37
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 38
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 38
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription.......................................................... 38
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 38
Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels...... 40
Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 41
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
information .......................................................... 42
Using iPod™.......................................................... 43
Controlling iPod™................................................... 43
Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 45
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver
and your Bluetooth component............................ 45
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 45
Using USB storage devices................................... 46
Playback of the USB storage device........................ 46
Other functions ..................................................... 47
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 47
Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 47
Setting the option menu for each input source
(Option menu)................................................... 48
Option menu items................................................... 48
Selecting a video signal to be output during an
audio reproduction............................................... 50
Editing surround decoders/sound field
programs ........................................................... 51
Setting sound field parameters................................. 51
Sound field parameters ............................................ 51
Operating various settings for this unit
(Setup menu) ..................................................... 55
Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 56
Speaker Setup .......................................................... 56
Sound Setup ............................................................. 58
Function Setup ......................................................... 59
DSP Parameter ......................................................... 61
Memory Guard......................................................... 61
Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 62
Connecting Zone2.................................................... 62
Controlling Zone2.................................................... 63
Controlling other components with the remote
control................................................................ 64
Setting remote control codes.................................... 64
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 64
Advanced setup..................................................... 65
Troubleshooting .................................................... 67
Glossary ................................................................. 78
Sound field program information ....................... 81
Information on HDMI™...................................... 82
Specifications......................................................... 83
Index ...................................................................... 84
(at the end of this manual)
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIX
List of remote control codes.................................... i
Information about software................................... x
2 En
INTRODUCTION
■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
• Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)
• FRONT L/R: 120 W + 120 W
• CENTER: 120 W
• SURROUND L/R: 120 W + 120 W
• SURROUND BACK L/R: 120 W + 120 W
■ Speaker/Preout outputs
• Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals
(2-channel for presence or Zone2), preout jacks (7.1-
channel)
■ Input/Output terminals
Input terminals
• HDMI input x 4
• Audio/Visual input
[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input
(optical) x 2, analog input x 2
[Video] Component video x 2, Video x 4
• Audio input (analog) x 2
• Phono input (analog) x 1
• Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel)
• V-AUX input
[Audio] Analog x 1
[Video] Video x 1
• DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately)
• USB port to connect a USB storage device
Output terminals
• Monitor output
[Audio/Video] HDMI x 1
[Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1
• Audio/Visual output
[Audio] Analog x 1
[Video] Video x 1
• Audio output
Analog x 1
• Zone2 output
Analog x 1
Other terminals
Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1
Trigger output x 1
■ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the
creation of sound fields
• CINEMA DSP 3D
• Compressed Music Enhancer mode
• Virtual CINEMA DSP
• SILENT CINEMA
■ Digital audio decoders
• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS Express
• Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
• DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1
• Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx decoder
• DSD decoder
• DTS NEO:6 decoder
• Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. model only)
■ Radio tuners
• FM/AM tuning capability
• HD Radio digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A.
model only)
•
XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM Mini-
Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)
•
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using
SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)
■
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
• HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-
definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio.
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission
capability
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
capability
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
• Analog to analog and HDMI digital video up-
conversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI)
capability for monitor out
•
Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video
output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p)
→
720p, 1080i or 1080p
• HDMI control function supported
■ Automatic speaker setup features
• “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker
outputs suitable for listening environments.
■ Other features
• 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
• GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit
to suit individual audiovisual system
• iPod and USB file browsing and album art display
capability
• Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
• Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
• SCENE function for changing input sources and sound
field programs with one key
• Bi-amplification connection capability
• Sleep timer
• Multi-zone function
• iTunes Tagging function (U.S.A. model only)
Features
3 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-
HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Bluetooth
™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by
Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
available in Alaska and Hawaii.
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity
Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD
Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Check that you received all of the following parts.
• Remote control (page 7)
• Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 9)
• Optimizer microphone (page 20)
• AM loop antenna (page 18)
• Indoor FM antenna (page 18)
About this manual
• Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between
the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of
differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
• For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other
objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image.
• “KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4).for the information about each position of the parts.
• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
Supplied accessories
4 En
A ZONE2 ON/OFF
Switches the zone function on and off (page 63).
B HDMI THROUGH
Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby.
• when the HDMI control function is on
• when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently
working
C ZONE2 CONTROL
Enables operation of a receiver set in Zone2, including input
source switching, volume control and tuner operation, with the
main amplifier or remote control after this key is pressed
(page 63).
D INFO
Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc)
displayed on the front panel display (page 25).
E MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 31) or XM/
SIRIUS channels as preset channels (pages 36 and 40).
F PRESET l / h
Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 31) or an XM/SIRIUS
preset channel (pages 36 and 40).
G FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h)
Change the tuner bands between FM and AM.
Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS.
H TUNING/CH l / h
Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.
I Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (page 6).
J VOLUME control
Controls the volume of this unit (page 23).
K MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns this unit on and off (page 19).
L PHONES jack
For plugging headphones (page 25).
M TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers
(page 24).
N PROGRAM selector
Changes sound field programs (page 26).
O STRAIGHT
Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight
decode mode (page 29).
P SCENE
Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
programs (page 23).
Q PURE DIRECT
Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 24). This key lights up
when Pure Direct mode is on.
R INPUT selector
Selects an input source (page 23).
S OPTIMIZER MIC jack
For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting
output characteristics of speakers (page 20).
T VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack
For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game
console (page 18).
U AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack
For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game
console (page 18).
V USB port
For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio
player (page 18)
Part names and functions
Front panel
MAIN
ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO
AUDIO
THROUGH
VIDEO
AUX
USB
VOLUME
HDMI
EFFECT
BD/DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
SCENE
ZONE2
ON/OFF
INFO
MEMORY
ZONE2
CONTROL
PRESET
l
h
l
h
l
h
CATEGORY
FM AM
TUNING/CH
KNQMO R
ABC D E F G H I J
SULPTV
5 En
Part names and functions
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
a SIRIUS jack
For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately)
(page 38).
b DOCK terminal
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-
11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 17).
c XM jack
For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
(sold separately) (page 34).
d PHONO jacks
For connecting a turntable (page 15).
e MONITOR OUT jacks
Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as
a TV (page 14).
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting an external component that supports the remote
control function (page 17).
TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal
to operate it linked with operation of this unit. For example,
when an electric screen that supports a trigger input is
connected, it opens and closes linked with operation of an input
source selected in this unit.
f HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 jacks
For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external
components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (pages 14 and 15).
g ANTENNA terminals
For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 18).
h SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting front, center, surround and surround back
speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or
the speakers for Zone2 (page 62) to EXTRA SP terminals.
i Power cable
Connect this cable to an AC wall outlet (page 19).
j AV 1-6 jacks
For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6
(page 15).
k AV OUT jacks
Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source
to an external component (page 15).
l AUDIO 1/2 jacks
For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2
(page 15).
m MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
(page 16).
n AUDIO OUT jacks
Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an
external component (page 15).
o ZONE2 OUT jacks
Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a
different zone (page 62).
p PRE OUT jacks
Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an
external amplifier (page 17).
Rear panel
DOCK
PHONO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
A
V
1
AV 2
COAXIAL
AV 3
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
VIDEO
GND
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
HD Radio
GND
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
VIDEO
IN
OUT
MONITOR OUT
SPEAKERS
TRIGGER OUT
12V
0.1A MAX.
FRONT
CENTER
SINGLE
CLASS 2 WIRING
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
12
CENTER
PR
PB
Y
REMOTE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SIRIUS
XM
bca
jklmno p
de f g h i
6 En
Part names and functions
a HDMI indicator
Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is
selected as an input source.
b XM indicator
Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source.
c SIRIUS indicator
Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input
source.
d HD indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception
band (page 32).
e TAG indicator
Lights up when the selected HR Radio program (or song being
played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature (page 32).
f CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP
is selected.
g CINEMA DSP 3D indicator
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated.
h Tuner indicator
Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/
AM station (page 30).
i ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone2 is turned on.
j SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 47).
k MUTE indicator
Flashes when audio is muted.
l VOLUME indicator
Displays volume levels.
m Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are
available for operations.
n Multi information display
Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.
o Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently
output.
Front panel display
STEREO
SLEEP
TAG
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SB SBR
MUTE
SIRIUS
XM
3
ZONE
2
HD
ab gfdecjlihk
mn om
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SB SBR
PL PR
Subwoofer
Front L
Surround L
Surround back L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround back R
Surround back
Presence L Presence R
7 En
Part names and functions
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
a Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
b MAIN/ZONE2
Switches amplifiers (Main or Zone2) to be operated by the
remote control (page 63).
c SOURCE POWER
Switches an external component on and off.
d Input selection keys
e Tuner keys
f INFO
Changes the information shown on the front panel display
(page 25).
g Sound selection keys
Selects sound field programs (page 26).
h SCENE
Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
programs (page 23).
i ON SCREEN
Displays the GUI screen (page 24).
k External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback etc. of external components
(page 64).
l Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
m TV control keys
Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 64).
n TRANSMIT
Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.
o CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(page 64).
p POWER
Switches this unit on and standby (page 19).
q SLEEP
Switches the sleep timer operations (page 47).
r OPTION
Displays the Option menu (page 48).
s VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume of this unit (page 23).
t DISPLAY
Displays the play information on the video monitor.
When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the
iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 43).
u MUTE
Turns the mute function on and off (page 24).
v HD Radio keys
Remote control
HDMI 1-4
Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.
AV 1-6
Selects AV inputs 1 through 6.
AUDIO 1/2
Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.
V-AUX
Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks.
PHONO
Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks.
USB
Selects a USB device connected to the USB port.
DOCK
Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal.
TUNER
Selects the FM/AM tuner.
SIRIUS
Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source.
XM
Selects an XM tuner as an input source.
MULTI
Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
MAIN
POWER
1234
1256
1234
7856
90
10
1234
POWER
SOURCE
V-AUX
PHONO
USB DOCK
MULTI
XM
SIRIUS
TUNER
FM
MOVIE
BD
DVD
TOP
MENU
MUSIC
SCENE
TV
CD
OPTIONON SCREEN
RETURN
REC
ENT
POWER
TV
TV VOL
INPUT
MUTE
TV CH
ENTER
VOLUME
DISPLAY
MUTE
MENU
RADIO
STEREO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO
MEMORY
AM
CATEGORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
SLEEP
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
ZONE2
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
TAG PRG SELECT
a
c
p
q
d
e
g
h
i
r
s
t
u
v
k
l
m
b
o
n
j
f
FM/AM
Switches a band between FM and AM.
(CATEGORY l / h)
Select a channel category for XM/
SIRIUS.
MEMORY
Presets radio stations.
PRESET k / n
Selects a preset station.
TUN./CH k / n
Changes FM/AM frequencies or
XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.
j Cursors k / n / l / h
Select menu items or change
settings.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen or
ends the menu display.
TAG
Stores “tag” data to the iPod or internal
memory of this unit (page 32).
PRG SELECT
Selects an HD Radio audio program
(page 32).
8 En
When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on
operations and settings.
Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items
necessary for setup.
For example, prepare the following items for setting up a
7.1-channel sound system.
y
• Prepare two magnetically shielded speakers (for front). The priority of
the requirement of other speakers is as follows:
1 Two surround speakers
2 One center speaker
3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
• If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically
shielded speakers.
• Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables.
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
y
• This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)
that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic
characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,
and room acoustics, etc.).
You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using
the YPAO technology (☞P. 20).
Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.
Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.
Select the component connected in step 3 as an input
source and start playback.
y
• This unit supports the SCENE function (page 23) that changes the input
source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for
different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select
from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key.
Quick start guide
Step 1: Prepare items for setup
Requirements qty.
Speakers Front speaker 2
Center speaker 1
Surround speaker 2
Surround back
speaker
2
Active subwoofer 1
Speaker cable 7
Subwoofer cable 1
Reproduction component such as DVD player 1
Video monitor such as TV 1
Video cable or HDMI cable 2
Audio cable 2
Front right speaker
Subwoofer
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Front left
speaker
Video monitor
Center
speaker
Components
(such as DVD player)
Surround Back
right speaker
Surround Back
left speaker
Step 2: Set up your speakers
• Placing speakers ☞P. 1 0
• Connecting speakers ☞P. 1 1
Step 3: Connect your components
• Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 1 4
• Connecting other components ☞P. 1 5
• Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder ☞P. 1 6
• Connecting an external amplifier ☞P. 1 7
• Connecting a USB storage device ☞P. 1 8
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞P. 1 7
• Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 1 8
• Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞P. 3 4
• Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner ☞P. 3 8
Step 4: Turn on the power
• Connecting the power cable ☞P. 1 9
• Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 1 9
Step 5: Select the input source and start
playback
• Basic procedure ☞P. 2 3
• Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 2 6
9 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PREPARATION
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+
and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Notes
• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control narrows
– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries
to leak.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be
different even though they look the same.
• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately,
taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material
comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth,
rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery
compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
• Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local
regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes,
or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents
of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries
and set the remote control code.
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be
sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
y
• You can operate external components with this remote control by setting
the remote control code (page 64).
Preparing remote control
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
Using the remote control
30 30
Remote control sensor window
within 6 m (20 ft)
10 En
This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommended the following speaker layout in order to obtain the
optimum surround effect.
7.1-channel speaker layout
6.1-channel speaker layout
5.1-channel speaker layout
■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds
(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at
an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When
using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the
speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom.
■ Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and
right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just
above or just under the center of the TV with the front
surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a
screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the
listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the
5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further
back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout.
■ Surround back left and right speakers (SBL
and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear
effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the
listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each
other, ideally at the same distance as that between the
front left and right speakers.
In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel sound signals are mixed down and output
from the single surround back speaker.
In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel sound signals are output from the surround
left and right speakers.
■ Subwoofer (SW)
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-
frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital
and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in
amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and
right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections
from a wall.
Connections
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
SW
30 cm (12 in) or more
60˚
30˚
SB
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
SW
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
SW
Speaker channels
11 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the
front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the
sound field programs (page 26). We recommend that you
use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers,
connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set
“Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 57).
Connect your speakers to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout.
y
• Connect optional presence speakers or Zone2 speakers (page 62) to the EXTRA SP terminals.
• You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them.
■ 7.1-channel (with presence speakers)
■ 6.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers)
■ 5.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers)
FR
PRPL
C
FL
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft)
Connecting speakers
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker L FRONT (L)
b Front speaker R FRONT (R)
c Center speaker CENTER
d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)
e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)
f Surround back speaker L SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP (L)
g Surround back speaker R SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP (R)
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1
i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2
j Presence speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)
k Presence speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SINGLE
CLASS 2 WIRING
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
12
SU
R.BA
CK
SUBWOOFER
H
INP
U
T
AUDI
O
OUT
ZONE
2
O
U
T
FR
O
N
T
SU
RR
OU
ND
SU
R. BA
CK
P
RE OUT
C
ENTE
R
S
IN
G
LE
A
NTENN
A
UNBAL.
FM
H
D Rad
io
G
N
D
AM
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
T
2V
MAX.
C
ENTER
E
c
g f
h i
e d
b a
k j
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker L FRONT (L)
b Front speaker R FRONT (R)
c Center speaker CENTER
d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)
e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)
f Surround back speaker SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE)
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1
i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2
j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)
k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker L FRONT (L)
b Front speaker R FRONT (R)
c Center speaker CENTER
d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)
e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1
i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2
j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)
k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)
12 En
Connections
■ Connecting speaker cables
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist bare wires of the cable
together so that they will not cause a short
circuits.
2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare
wires into the hole and then tighten the knob.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker
system which supports bi-amplification connection as
shown below. To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP”
to “ON” in the advanced setup menu (page 65).
Note
• You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and
Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made.
Caution
• A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently
or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit
and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this
unit and the other end to that of your speaker.
• Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or
speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned
on.
• If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor. If it does not work,
use magnetically shielded speakers.
• Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before
connecting the speakers (page 65). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN”.
Connecting the banana plug
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into
the end of the terminal.
10 mm (0.4 in)
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Caution
Before making bi-amplification connections, remove
any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for
details.
When not making bi-amplification connections, make
sure that the brackets or cables are connected before
connecting the speaker cables.
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT
Front speakers
Right Left
This unit
13 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are
connecting.
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Video/audio jacks
y
• We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI
cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit
to other DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection
(page 49).
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Jack and cables Description
Analog audio jacks To transmit conventional analog
stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin
cables. Connect red plugs to red
jacks (R) and white plugs to white
jacks (L).
COAXIAL jacks To transmit coaxial digital audio
signals. Use pin cables for digital
audio signals.
OPTICAL jacks To transmit optical digital audio
signals. Use optical fiber cables for
optical digital audio signals.
Jack and cables Description
VIDEO jacks To transmit conventional
composite video signals. Use video
pin cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
To transmit component video
signals that include luminance (Y),
chrominance blue (PB) and
chrominance red (PR) components.
Use component video cables.
L
R
(white)
(red)
COAXIAL
C
(orange)
OPTICAL
O
VIDEO
V
(yellow)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
P
R
(red)
(blue)
(green)
Jack and cables Description
HDMI jacks To transmit digital video and
digital audio signals. Use HDMI
cables.
This unit automatically converts input video signals and
outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jack and
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks (video conversion).
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
Input Output
Through Converted
14 En
Connections
According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of
the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an
HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
■ To connect an HDMI video monitor
y
• This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 47). If your TV
supports the HDMI control function, you can control this unit with the
remote control of your TV.
■ To connect component video monitor
■ To connect composite video monitor
To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection
between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio
output jack of the TV.
If the TV supports an optical digital output, we
recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the
AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1
jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE
function (page 23).
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
a HDMI input HDMI OUT
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
b Component video output MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
c Video input (composite) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)
HDMI OUT
VIDEO
MO
NIT
O
R
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PH
O
N
O
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
AV 4
AV
5
A
V 6
AV
OU
T
A
UDIO1
AUDI
O
2
FR
O
N
T
SU
RR
OU
N
D
S
UR.B
A
MU
LTI
C
H INP
U
GND
HDMI 1
(
BD
/
DV
D
)
HDMI 2
H
D
M
IN
O
U
T
T
RI
GG
ER
O
U
T
12V
0
.1
A
MAX.
R
EM
O
T
E
HDMI
V
a
c
b
P
B
YP
R
TV, or projector
Outputting TV sounds from this unit
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV
1
P
R
P
B
Y
AV
2
CO
AXIA
L
A
V 3
(
C
D
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
AL
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
OUT
AUDIO1
A
U
D
VIDE
O
GND
P
R
P
B
Y
O
Digital output
(optical)
TV
15 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies
from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
■ Audio and video player / Set-top box
Connecting other components
Output jacks on the connected external component Input sources/jacks of this unit
External
component
Signal Output jack Input source Input jack
External component
with HDMI output
Audio/Video HDMI output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1
HDMI 2 HDMI 2
HDMI 3 HDMI 3
HDMI 4 HDMI 4
External component
with component video
output
Audio Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL
Video Component video COMPONENT VIDEO
Audio Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL
Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO
External component
with composite video
output
Audio Coaxial digital output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Optical digital output AV 4 OPTICAL
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Analog audio output AV 6 Analog audio
Video Composite output VIDEO
PHONO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV
1
AV 2
COAXIAL
AV 3
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
GND
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
TRIGGER
OUT
CENTER
D
OCK
Z
O
O
H
DMI
OUT
V
IDE
O
IN
OU
T
MONITOR OU
T
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
V
0
.1A MAX
.
F
R
O
N
T
P
R
P
B
Y
R
EM
O
T
E
C
OMPONENT
VIDE
O
S
IRIU
S
XM
Audio / video input
(AV 1-6)
Audio / video output (AV OUT)
Audio input (AUDIO 1/2)
HDMI input
(HDMI 1-4)
Audio output
(AUDIO OUT)
Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT)
Audio input (PHONO)
16 En
Connections
y
• Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If your Yamaha component has the remote in/out terminal, you can
switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (page 23).
• You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 61).
• See page 62 on how to use the ZONE2 OUT jacks.
• When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the
AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when
“AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 50).
■ Audio player
y
• We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack.
• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front
L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and
Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multi-
format player, external decoder, etc.
Notes
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field
processor is automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-
channel speaker system when using this feature.
• You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio
reproduction (page 50). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel
output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making
a video connection (component video or composite).
Output jacks on the connected external component Input sources/jacks of this unit
External component Output jack Input source Input jack
External component with optical digital
output
Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL
AV 4 OPTICAL
External component with coaxial digital
output
Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL
AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL
External component with analog audio
output
Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio
AV 6 Analog audio
AUDIO 1 Analog audio
AUDIO 2 Analog audio
Turntable Analog audio output PHONO Analog audio
About audio/video output terminals
Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the
selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jacks and AUDIO OUT jacks. An HDMI input signal,
COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output.
When using the AV OUT jacks: connect an external component to the VIDEO or analog audio terminal.
When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal.
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
LRLR RL
Surround
back out
Surround
out
Front out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Multi-format player or external decoder
(7.1-channel output)
17 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Connecting an external amplifier
If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack
outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding
speaker terminals.
Note
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any
connections to the speaker terminals.
a FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
c SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one
external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to
the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.
y
• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set
“Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 57).
d CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
e SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
■ Transmitting/receiving remote control signals
When the components have the capability of the
transmission of the remote control signals, connect the
REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote
control input and output jack with the monaural analog
mini cable as follows.
y
• If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control
signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start
playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function
(page 23).
• If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE
OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup
menu (page 65).
This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can
connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold
separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-
10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth
component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK
terminal.
Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/
receiver and this unit.
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTERSINGLE
1
2
abc d
e
IN
OUT
REMOTE
HDMI 1
B
D
/
DVD
)
HDMI
2
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
VIDE
O
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
P
R
P
B
Y
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
Remote
control out
Remote
control in
Infrared signal
receiver or Yamaha
component
IR flasher or Yamaha
component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver
DOCK
P
H
O
N
O
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDE
O
GND
H
DMI OU
T
S
IRI
US
XM
Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
18 En
Connections
Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio
player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For
information about USB storage devices supported by this
unit, see page 46.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to
turn down the volume of this unit and other components
before making connections.
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are
supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to
the respective jacks.
y
• The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good
reception.
• Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.
• If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor
antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
• Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is
connected.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
Connecting the AM loop antenna
The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You
can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other
to the GND terminal.
Connecting a USB storage device
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks
US
B
S
TRAI
G
H
T
PURE
DIRE
C
T
INPUT
O
PTIMIZER
MIC
VIDE
O
A
UDI
O
V
IDE
O
A
U
X
VO
LUM
E
EFFE
CT
B
D
/
DVD
TV
CD
R
ADI
O
SC
EN
E
E
M
O
R
Y
PRE
S
ET
l
h
l
h
l
h
C
ATE
GO
RY
FM
A
M
T
UNIN
G/C
H
USB
USB memory device or
USB portable audio player
VIDEO
AUDIO
V
IDE
O
A
U
X
S
TRAI
G
H
T
PURE
DIRE
C
T
INPUT
O
PTIMIZER
MIC
US
B
VO
LUM
E
E
FFE
CT
B
D
/
DVD
TV
CD
R
ADIO
SC
EN
E
E
M
O
R
Y
PRE
S
ET
l
h
l
h
l
h
C
ATE
GO
RY
FM
AM
T
UNIN
G/C
H
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
V
L
R
Game console or video
camera
Analog audio
output
Video output
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
HD Radio
GND
AM
2
H
DMI 3
HDMI 4
IN
S
PEAKER
S
S
IN
G
L
E
C
LA
SS
2 WIRIN
G
E
XTRA
S
P
Z
ONE2/PRESENCE
R
EM
O
T
E
Outdoor AM antenna
Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to
33 ft) vinyl-covered wire,
and extend it outdoors
(use the AM loop antenna
together with this
antenna).
Ground (GND terminal)
The GND terminal is not for earth grounding.
To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a
vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip,
and place it in the moist ground.
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop
antenna
Press and hold ReleaseInsert
19 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
After all connections are complete, plug the power cable
of this unit into an AC wall outlet.
1 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or pPOWER on the remote control)
to turn on this unit.
2 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
pPOWER) again to turn off this unit
(standby mode).
y
• The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.
• You can also turn on this unit by pressing PSCENE (or hSCENE).
• This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby
mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall
outlet.
Connecting the power cable
Turning this unit on and off
Caution
Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so
may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit
to be saved incorrectly.
C
LA
SS
2 WIRIN
G
N
E2
/
PRE
S
EN
CE
To the AC wall outlet
Power cable
20 En
This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the
output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics
of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.
1 Check the following points.
Before starting the automatic setup, check the
following.
• All speakers and subwoofer are connected
properly.
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
• The video monitor is connected properly.
• This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
• This unit is selected as the video input source of the
video monitor.
• The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
• The crossover frequency controls of the connected
subwoofer are set to the maximum.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the SOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
“MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel
display.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
y
• You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 56).
3 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
y
• It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when
seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to
the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Caution
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not
allow small children to enter the room during the
procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as
quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is
in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the
results may not be satisfactory.
y
• You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers
with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56).
Using Auto Setup
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer
INP
U
T
V
IDE
O
AUDIO
VIDE
O
A
U
X
US
B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
Optimizer microphone
Auto Setup
Extra Speaker Assignment
PresenceZone2 None
FrontFlat Natural
EQ Type
Move focus
Start
Start
Optimizer microphone
21 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 When the speakers are connected to EXTRA
SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly
to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and
then press jCursor l / h to select how to
use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”,
“Presence” or “None”.
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,
press iON SCREEN once and then operate this
unit.
5 To select sound characteristics for
adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ
Type” and then press jCursor l / h.
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,
press iON SCREEN once and then operate this
unit.
This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the
output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer
is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on
automatically measured speaker characteristics.
In “EQ Type”, you can select the following
parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the
desired sound characteristics.
Natural
This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound.
Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem
too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”.
Flat
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics. Select this if your speakers have
similar qualities.
Front
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics as the front left and right speakers.
Select this if your front left and right speakers have
significantly better qualities than the other speakers.
6 Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then
press jENTER to start the setup procedure.
A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10
seconds. A loud test tone is output during
measurement.
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.
When measurement is successfully completed,
“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display
and the measurement result appears on the GUI
screen.
Speaker Config
Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in
the following order:
Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround
Back/Subwoofer
Distance (Min / Max)
Displays the speaker distance from the listening position
in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Level (Min / Max)
Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level
Notes
• If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement
is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an
error message is displayed during measurement” (page 22).
• If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx
indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When
a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 22).
7 Press jENTER to confirm the settings.
The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to
measurement results.
To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to
select “Cancel” and press jENTER.
When the following screen appears, remove the
optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now
complete.
y
• If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”.
• Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of
speakers.
• If you press jENTER before removing the optimizer microphone,
“Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56) is
displayed.
Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise
results, stay where you will not disturb the
measurement, such as to the side of or behind the
speakers or outside the room.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it
in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after
measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be
subjected to high temperatures such on an AV
component.
3 /4 / 0.1
8.0ft / 8.5ft
-3.5dB / +4.5dB
Auto Setup
Speaker Config :
Distance (Min / Max) :
Level (Min / Max) :
Result
Set
Cancel
Finish
Select items
Auto Setup
Please disconnect the micorphone
(Then this screen will automatically disappear)
Return
Auto Setup Completed !
22 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
If an error is detected during measurement, the
measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI
screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details
on each error message, see page 76.
Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h
to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press
jENTER.
Retry
Performs “Auto Setup” again.
Exit
Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”.
y
• When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To
continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that
you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.
If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx
warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the
warning and solve the problem. For details on each
warning message, see page 77.
y
• Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is
displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto
Setup” again.
1 Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx
warning(s)” and then press jENTER.
Details of the warning message are displayed. If there
are multiple warning messages, you can display the
next message using jCursor h.
2 To return to the top result display, press
jENTER again.
When an error message is displayed
during measurement
When a warning message is displayed
after measurement
Error
FrontL/R channel signals are not detected.
Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers.
Move focus
E-1 : No Front Speakers
Retry Exit
3 /4 / 0.1
8.0ft / 8.5ft
-3.5dB / +4.5dB
Auto Setup
Speaker Config :
Distance (Min / Max) :
Level (Min / Max) :
Result
Set Cancel
See details
Select items
Check 2 warnings
23 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
1 Tur n on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dInput selection key) to select an input
source.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds.
y
• You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 24).
• You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel
display or GUI screen as necessary (page 61).
3 Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a radio
station on the tuner.
Refer to the operating instructions of the external
component for details on playback. For selecting
radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth
component or USB storage device using this unit, see
the following.
• FM/AM radio tuning (page 30)
• iPod playback (page 43)
• Bluetooth component playback (page 45)
• USB storage device playback (page 46)
4 Turn the JVOLUME control (or press
sVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume.
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change
input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four
scenes are available for different usages, such as playing
movies or music. The following input sources and sound
field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.
y
• When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing
PSCENE (or hSCENE).
• If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the
SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can
start playback on the player by using the SCENE function.
Press PSCENE (or hSCENE).
y
• You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 24).
Playback
Basic procedure
VOL.
AV1
Input source name
Note
When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some
conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure
that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is
output, do the following.
1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,
only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the
condition is not improved, the problem may results from the
playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu
after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to
“DTS” (page 49).
Using the SCENE function
Keys Input source Sound field program
BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight
TV AV 1 Straight
CD AV 3 Straight
RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer
Selecting a SCENE
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
Volume-18.5dB
Volume
24 En
Playback
Select the desired input source/sound field
program and then press and hold PSCENE (or
hSCENE) key to edit until “SET Complete”
appears on the front panel display.
y
• If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of
an external component to the input source (page 64).
You can operate an external component with the remote
control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the
external component for each input source. Setting remote
control codes for desired input sources allows you to
switch between external components linked to scene
selections.
1 Register the remote control code of an
external component to the desired input
source (page 64).
Note
• This feature is not available for TUNER, SIRIUS and XM input
sources.
2 While holding down the desired hSCENE
key, press and hold the dInput selection
key to which you registered a remote control
code in step 1.
From now on the external component can be remotely
controllable just by selecting a scene.
1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
2 Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the
page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to
select the desired source.
y
• If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you
can select the desired input source and sound field program at once.
3 Press jENTER.
1 Press uMUTE on the remote control to mute
the audio output.
The MUTE indicator on the front panel display
flashes while audio output is muted.
2 Press uMUTE again to resume audio
output.
You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range
(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output
from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired
tone.
1 Press MTONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
The current setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
2 Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to adjust
the frequency range.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
The display returns to the previous screen
automatically in few seconds.
Notes
• The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure
Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.
• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from
other channels well.
Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
Press QPURE DIRECT (or gPURE DIRECT)
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
QPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct
mode on.
Registering input source/sound field
program
Switching remotely controlled external
components linked to scene selections
Selecting a source on the GUI screen
Category Source
Select Scene BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO
Select Media USB, DOCK, SIRIUS, XM,
TUNER, PHONO, V-AUX,
MULTI CH
Select Input HDMI1-4, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2
Select Scene
BD/DVD TV CD RADIO
Muting audio output
Adjusting high/low frequency sounds
(tone control)
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Treble
0.0dB
25 En
Playback
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct
mode.
– sound field program, tone control
– display and operation of the Option menu and Setup
menu
– multi-zone function
y
• The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure
Direct mode.
Plug your headphones in the LPHONES jack on
the front panel.
When you select a sound field program while using the
headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT
CINEMA mode.
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker
terminals.
• When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are
divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the
input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones.
When HDMI 1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source,
you can display audio/video signal information.
y
• Input signal information is displayed on both the GUI screen and front
panel display.
1 Select the desired input source and then
press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for the selected input source is
displayed (page 48).
2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Signal Info”
and then press jENTER.
Information on the input signal is displayed. See
page 49 for details about each information.
Note
• If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
3 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.
Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly.
Available information differs depending on the selected
input source.
For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP
Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel
display.
Note
• Information marked with “*” is not available when analog HD Radio
station is selected.
Using your headphones
Displaying input signal information
Input
DSP
Dolby TrueHD
3 / 2 / 0.1
96kHz
---
HDMI 480p
HDMI 1080p
Signal Info
<Audio>
Format
Channel
Sampling Frequency
Bitrate
<Video>
Video In
Video Out
HDMI 1
Straight
Changing information on the front
panel display
Input source Information
HDMI1-4
AV1-6
AUDIO1/2
V-AUX
PHONO
iPod (DOCK) (simple
remote mode)
BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Input
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
USB
iPod (DOCK) (menu
browse mode)
(on play information display)
DSP Program, Audio Decoder,
Song, Artist, Album
(on GUI screen)
List
TUNER Frequency, DSP Program,
Audio Decoder
(for HD Radio information)
Call Sign*, Category*, Artist /
Song*, Album*, Tag Info, DSP
Program, Audio Decoder,
Frequency
SIRIUS Channel, Category, Artist /
Song, Composer, Antenna, DSP
Program, Audio Decoder
XM Channel, Category, Artist /
Song, Antenna, DSP Program,
Audio Decoder
MULTI CH Input
Straight
Input source
Sound field program
26 En
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds
for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.
■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel
Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program.
■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control
Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.
Sound field programs for movies/TV programs ...............................Press gMOVIE repeatedly.
Sound field programs for music........................................................Press gMUSIC repeatedly.
Stereo reproduction ...........................................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly.
Multi-channel stereo reproduction....................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly.
Compressed music enhancer.............................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly.
Surround decoder ..............................................................................Press gSUR.DECODE repeatedly.
For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display.
Notes
• Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input
source is applied again.
• When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources or audio
signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 29) is automatically selected.
This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select
a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
y
• You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6).
• Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 51.
• in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP.
Enjoying the sound field programs
Selecting sound field programs
Sound field program descriptions
For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE)
Program Descriptions
Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic
positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an
ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent
dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-
featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.
Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to
the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio
channels and the clarity of the sound.
Sci-Fi
Program name
Sound field program category
27 En
Enjoying the sound field programs
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to
musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones
and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue
the listener even after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a
good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to
create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live
feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center
while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence
in the stadium.
Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data
that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling
by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for
movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during
play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.
For audio music sources (MUSIC)
Program Descriptions
Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the
interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very
full, rich sound.
Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant
reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field
features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor
can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener
can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals
and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a
big live hall.
For stereo reproduction (STEREO)
Program Descriptions
2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
Program Descriptions
28 En
Enjoying the sound field programs
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.
y
• An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 29) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source.
For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO)
Program Descriptions
7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit
downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER)
Program Descriptions
Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel
compression artifacts.
7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE)
Decoder Descriptions
Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.
PLIIx Movie /
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
PLIIx Music /
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
PLIIx Game /
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music.
Neural Sur.
(U.S.A. model only)
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM (sampling rate of 96 kHz or lower), Dolby Digital, DTS Digital
Surround (except for DTS 96/24), DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible
signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight
into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM
signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround
program of XM Satellite Radio.
29 En
Enjoying the sound field programs
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without
sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output
from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel
input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced
without a sound field effect.
1 To enable straight decode mode, press
OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT).
“Straight” appears on the front panel display.
2 To cancel straight decode mode, press
OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) again.
A sound field program name appears on the front
panel display, and sound is reproduced with that
sound field effect.
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound
field surround effects even without any surround speakers
by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy
Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to
“None” (page 57), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode.
Note
• Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if
you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 57).
– headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.
– 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used.
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode
is automatically selected when you connect the headphone
plug to the PHONES jack.
Note
• SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.
– 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected.
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence
speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to
the EXTRA SP terminals, perform the following settings
and then select a CINEMA DSP related sound field
program.
• Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack.
• Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence”
(page 57).
• Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 51).
When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D
mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights
up.
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decode mode)
Enjoying sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA
DSP)
Enjoy sound field programs with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode
30 En
The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two
modes for tuning.
■ Frequency tuning mode
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching
or specifying its frequency.
■ Preset tuning mode
You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by
registering them to specific numbers, and later just select
those numbers to tune in.
Note
• Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press GFM (eFM) or GAM (eAM) to select
a band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display
according to the band that you have selected.
3 Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH
k / n) to specify the frequency.
To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or
k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n).
The TUNED indicator on the front panel display
lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The
STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being
broadcasted is in stereo.
The frequency changes in the following manner according
to how you press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./
CH k / n).
When you press the key more than 1 second
The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is
detectable around the current frequency. This is effective
when the tuner can receive strong signals without any
interference. Once the search starts, release the key.
When you keep holding the key, the search continues even
when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to
tune in to a specific station.
When you press and release the key
The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps.
Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong
signals and stations are skipped during the search.
y
• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the
Option menu (page 49).
• (U.S.A. model only)
When tuning in to an HD Radio station, the HD indicator lights up. See
page 32 for details about the HD Radio features.
4 To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press
lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of
the station.
Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set
the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889”.
Notes
• When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a
preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning
mode using HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n)
prior to the operation.
• “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the
entered frequency is correct.
You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset).
The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong
signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM
stations, use manual station preset.
(U.S.A. model only)
You can register up to 40 FM HD Radio, AM HD Radio
and analog FM radio stations with strong signals.
Note
• (U.S.A. model only)
If you register an FM HD Radio station with this feature, only the main
audio program of the station (HD1) will be stored. To store other audio
program, preset the station manually.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
(page 48).
3 Select “Auto Preset” and then press
jENTER.
Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later
from the lowest frequency upwards.
FM/AM tuning
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station
(Frequency tuning)
STEREO
TUNED
FM92.5MHz
Registering FM/AM stations and
tuning in (Preset tuning)
Registering stations by automatic station
preset
Auto Preset
31 En
FM/AM tuning
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by
pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY”
is displayed on the front panel display.
• To cancel registration, press jRETURN.
During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY”
appears in the front panel display each time a station
is registered.
When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears
and then the display returns to the Option menu.
To return the display to the original state, press
rOPTION.
You can manually register FM stations with weak signals
or AM stations.
1 Tune in to the desired station (page 30).
y
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to
HD8), press vPRG SELECT to select the desired audio
program.
2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,
followed soon by the preset number to which the
station will be registered.
y
• By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than
2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically
register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the
lastly-registered preset number).
3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
to select the preset number to which the
station will be registered.
When you select a preset number to which no station
is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a
preset number to which any station has been already
registered, the frequency of the station is displayed.
y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.
4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
When registration is complete, the display returns to
the original state.
y
• To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit
without any operations for about 30 seconds.
You can call preset stations registered by automatic station
preset or manual station preset.
Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to
select a preset number.
y
• Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped.
• “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are
registered.
• You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys
while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you
enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.”
appears if you enter an invalid number.
• When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency
is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l
/ h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation.
• (U.S.A. model only)
This unit may take a little time to call a sub-audio program of an HD
Radio station.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
(page 48).
3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset”
and then press jENTER.
y
• To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press
jRETURN.
4 Press jCursor k / n to select a preset
number to reset and then press jENTER.
The preset station registered to the selected preset
number is cleared. To clear the registration of
multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4.
5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.
Registering stations by manual station
preset
01:FM87.5MHz
Preset number Frequency
Status
01:Empty
Flashes
Frequency to be registered
Preset
number
Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)
Clearing preset stations
01:FM92.5MHz
Preset number
32 En
HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.
Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.
Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a
single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.
This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM
stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,
program types, and comments) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
Notes
• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you only tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio
station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 49).
• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM
station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by
using the lNumeric keys (page 30).
The HD indicator lights up in the front panel display when
this unit is tuned into an HD Radio reception band. In this
state, you can select the desired audio program if the
selected FM HD Radio station provides multiple audio
programs (up to 8).
■ When multiple audio programs are provided
Press vPRG SELECT b / a on the remote
control repeatedly to select the desired audio
program.
y
• You can also select audio program using lNumeric keys(1-8) and
lENT when this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode. In
case you select an audio program currently not available, “HDx Off” (“x”
indicates the program number) appears.
Notes
• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator
disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically
selected after approximately 20 seconds.
• Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the
broadcasting station and the time period.
■ When only one audio program is provided
If this unit is tuned into an FM HD Radio station including
only one audio program or an AM HD Radio station, you
cannot select audio programs.
■ Behavior of the display
This unit automatically shows the HD Radio information
(call sign, etc) on the front panel display after 3 seconds.
You can switch HD Radio information to be displayed
(page 33).
This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that
enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent
preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes
Tagging feature, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.
1 Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD
Radio audio program (if available).
If the selected HD Radio program (or song being
played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG
indicator lights up in the front panel display and
“TAG” appears on the GUI screen.
2 While a song you want to tag is being played
back, press vTAG on the remote control.
If a song is tagged, “StorageSuccess” and the number
of stored iTunes Tagging information files (up to 50)
appear in the front panel display.
Notes
• “Insufficient Data’ appears in the front panel display and GUI
screen if tagging is not available.
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 71)
Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)
Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs
HD
FM
88.9MHz1
Lights up
Audio program
number (relative/total)
Audio program
number (absolute)
HD
FM
87.5MHz
Lights up
Using the iTunes Tagging feature
HD
WXYZ-FM
HD
WXYZ-FM
TAG
TUNED
Lights up
33 En
Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• This unit transmits the “tag” data to the iPod if an iPod that
supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the “tag” data (up
to 50) in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your
iPod is stationed.
Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in
the front panel display or on the GUI screen.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display
or GUI screen, see “HD Radio Reception” (page 70).
■ Front panel display
Press
D
INFO
(or
f
INFO
) repeatedly to toggle the
following HD Radio information display modes.
Back to “Call Sign”
Display example (Call Sign)
■ GUI screen
Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.
a Preset number, call sign, audio program number
(relative/total)
b HD Radio icon, TUNED icon
c Program category, artist name, song title, album
title
d STEREO icon
e TAG icon
f Frequency indication gauge
g Band, frequency, audio program
y
• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it
is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.
Displaying HD Radio™ information
Call Sign
Call sign, frequency, audio program number (absolute)
Category
Program category, frequency, audio program number
(absolute)
Artist / Song
Artist name, song title, frequency, audio program
number (absolute)
Album
Album title, frequency, audio program number
(absolute)
Tag Info
The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored
in the internal memory, frequency, audio program
number (absolute)
DSP Program
Current sound field program (page 26), frequency, audio
program number (absolute)
Audio Decoder
Current audio decoder (page 28), frequency, audio
program number (absolute)
Frequency
Frequency, audio program number (absolute), audio
program number (relative/total)
HD
WXYZ-FM
Preset no.10:
FM 88.9MHz-1
Ch Name
Category
Artist
Song
Classic Rock
Frankie Zipper
Road to India
Made-to-order
Input
DSP
Tuner
Straight Enhancer
Option Menu
Data Hold
a
b
c
WXYZ-FM HD 1/3
STEREO
TAG
d
e
f
g
TUNED
34 En
Listening to Satellite Radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your
satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii).
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B,
Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play
games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment,
comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to
follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a
variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your
XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular
programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at
this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for
children.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US).
Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home
Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of
this unit. For details, see the operating instructions
provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM
Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing
window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors
or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or
on the GUI screen (page 37) to check the antenna reception level and
adjust the orientation of the antenna.
Notes
• If “CHECK ANTENNA”, “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL”
appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the
antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be
correct.
• When “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed, it means that the
connected antenna is old. See page 71 for details.
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-
Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio
system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to
subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There
are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:
on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,
and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the
following eight squares for reference.
Note
• The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate
your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://
activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You
will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to
activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15
minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM
Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the
full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
SIRIUS XM Radio Legal
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other
marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold
separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold
separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to
change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make
available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio
Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
XM
D
OC
K
P
H
O
N
O
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDEO
P
R
S
IRI
US
XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
(sold separately)
Activating XM Satellite Radio
35 En
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dXM) to select “XM” as the input source.
The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel
number, channel name, category, artist name, or song
title) for the currently selected channel appears on the
front panel display and GUI screen (page 37).
y
• When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically
recalls the previously selected channel.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or on the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71).
2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on this page.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access” on
this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”
(page 36).
y
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front
panel display or on the GUI screen (page 37).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 36).
■ All Channel Search mode
Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k /
n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all
channels.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by holding down
HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing
GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h).
■ Category Search mode
1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or
eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel
category.
“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during
the channel category selection. When you select the
category, the first channel in the category is selected.
Note
• If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode
returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).
2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or
eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
Note
• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is
not malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is out of service.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
■ Direct number access
In the All Channel Search mode or Category
search mode, press the lNumeric keys to
enter the desired three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.
y
• To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display,
select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric
keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input
number.
• Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you
can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel
number.
• If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or
two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel
number.
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71).
XM Satellite Radio
®
operations
001Preview
XM
Search mode
Channel number Channel name
00880's
XM
Pop
XM
Category
search mode
The first channel in the category
Category name
36 En
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel
easily by selecting the preset channel as described in
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this
page.
1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset
channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio
search modes.
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations”
(page 35).
2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
The indicator on the front panel display changes as
follows.
y
• By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than
2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically
register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the
lastly-registered preset number).
• To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.
3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
to select the stored preset station number.
y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.
• If you select a preset number being used (currently registered
channel number appears next to the preset number), the current
preset channel will be overwritten.
4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see
“Registering preset channels” on this page.
Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
repeatedly to change the preset channel number
(1 to 40).
y
• You can directly select a preset number by pressing a lNumeric
keys while calling a preset channel.
You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite
Radio channels.
1 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “XM” is displayed.
2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select
“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.
3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset
station number that you want to clear.
4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of
the selected preset channel.
To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,
repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press
rOPTION.
Registering XM Satellite Radio
channels
Registering preset channels
00880's
XM
P01:---<<008
XM
Currently registered channel number
(or “---” if empty)
Channel number to be
registered
Preset number to which new
channel number is registered
Calling a preset channel (Preset Search
mode)
Clearing preset channels
00880's
XM
Preset channel number
008 80's
XM
37 En
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information
on the front panel display or on the GUI screen.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display
or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71).
■ Front panel display
Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle
the following XM Satellite Radio information
display modes.
Back to “Channel”
Display example (Antenna)
y
• You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front
Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
■ GUI screen
Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.
a Channel number
b Search mode (page 35)
c Channel name, channel category, artist name,
song title
d Antenna reception level
y
• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it
is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™
information
Channel
Channel number, channel name
Category
Channel category, channel number
Artist / Song
Artist name, song title, channel number
Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number
DSP Program
Current sound field program (page 26), channel number
Audio Decoder
Current audio decoder (page 28), channel number
Antenna
XM
Ch 008
All Channel Search
Ch Name
Category
Artist
Song
80’s
Decades
Sanumemo
Road to India
Input
DSP
XM
Straight Enhancer
Option Menu
Hold Data
a
b
c
d
38 En
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the
SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see
the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect
tuner.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the
antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window
with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for
the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction
manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the
antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS
Information” screen on the GUI screen (page 42) to check the antenna
reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.
Notes
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front
panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is
incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner
and the antenna.
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does
not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need
to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To
activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is
uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is
12-digit number and it appears on the package of the
SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect
tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel “0” (see below).
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
2 Press l0 and then lENT to display the
Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”
(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of
your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the
front panel display.
Write the Sirius ID below.
ID:________________________________________
3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.
y
• Status messages appear on the front panel display or GUI screen
during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”
(page 73). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”
appears.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel
display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
(such as channel number, channel name, category,
artist name, or song title) for the currently selected
channel appears on the front panel display.
y
• When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
Notes
• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only
select “184” or “000”.
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or on the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”
(page 73).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription
S
IRI
US
DOCK
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDE
O
P
R
D
C
5
V
A
N
T
SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
To the AC wall outlet
Displaying the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations
184Weather
SIRIUS
Search mode
Channel number Channel name
39 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2 Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on this page.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access” on
this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”
(page 40).
y
• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the
front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 42).
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL
SIRIUS” (on the front panel display) and “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS
TO SUBSCRIBE” (on the GUI screen) appear.
• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 40).
■ All Channel Search mode
Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k /
n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all
channels.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by holding down HTUNING/CH
l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing
GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h).
■ Category Search mode
1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or
eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel
category.
“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during
channel category selection. When you select the
category, the first channel in the category is selected.
Note
• If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode
returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).
2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or
eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
Note
• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is
not malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is locked (page 41).
– the channel is out of service.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
■ Direct number access
In the All Channel Search mode or Category
search mode, press the lNumeric keys to
enter the desired three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.
y
• To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display,
select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric
keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input
number.
• Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you
can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel
number.
• If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or
two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel
number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel
display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the
lNumeric keys or press lENT to cancel (page 41).
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73).
001Hits1
SIRIUS
Pop
SIRIUS
Category
search mode
The first channel in the category
Category name
40 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel
easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as
described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search
mode)” on this page.
1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset
channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
search modes.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations”
(page 38).
2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
The indicator on the front panel display changes as
follows.
y
• By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than
2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically
register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the
lastly-registered preset number).
• To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.
3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
to select the stored preset station number.
y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.
• If you select a preset number being used (currently registered
channel number appears next to the preset number), the current
preset channel will be overwritten.
4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see
“Registering preset channels” on this page.
Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
repeatedly to change the preset channel number
(1 to 40).
You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels.
1 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.
2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select
“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.
3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset
station number that you want to clear.
4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of
the selected preset channel.
To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,
repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press
rOPTION.
Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
channels
Registering preset channels
001Hits1
SIRIUS
P01:---<<001
SIRIUS
Currently registered channel number
(or “---” if empty)
Channel number to be
registered
Preset number to which new
channel number is registered
Calling a preset channel (Preset Search
mode)
Clearing preset channels
001Hits1
SIRIUS
001 Hits 1
SIRIUS
41 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access
to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit
automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is
in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode
and you search a channel by pressing HTUNING/CH
l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number
(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.
1 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.
2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select
“Parental Lock” and then press jENTER.
3 Use jCursor l / h (to select a digit to edit)
and jCursor k / n (to select a number) to
enter the desired 4-digit code number.
If you have entered a code number before, enter the
same code number.
4 Press jENTER.
The confirmation screen appears.
5 Press jENTER again to confirm the code
number.
“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
list appears.
Note
• If a code number is already registered and you enter the different
number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter
the correct code number.
• If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it
using “SR PIN” (page 65).
6 Press jCursor l / h to select the category
of a channel you want to lock.
7 Press jCursor k / n to select a channel you
want to lock.
Notes
• You can also select a channel by using eCATEGORY l / h or
eTUN./CH k / n.
• While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed,
sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked.
8 Press jENTER to lock the selected
channel.
A check mark appears next to the locked channel on
the GUI screen. You can toggle channel lock and
unlock as you press jENTER.
9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to lock all the
desired channels.
10 Press jRETURN repeatedly to exit the
“Parental Lock” screen.
This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in
the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked,
this unit is tuned into “184 Weather/Emergency” or
“000 Sirius ID”.
Tune into the channel with direct number access (page 39)
or Preset Search mode (page 40). When you tune into the
locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel
display and GUI screen, followed by the following
message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the
lNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press
lENT.
Note
• If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel
display or the GUI screen and this unit is tuned into the previously
selected channel.
Setting the Parental Lock
Setting the code number and the locking
channels
The entered code number is needed for tuning in the
channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down below.
Code number: ________________________________
0 0 0 0
Input
DSP
Parental Lock
SIRIUS
7ch Enhancer
Edit
Set
Enter New PIN
Tuning into the locked channels
Input
DSP
Channel
001 SIRIUS Hits 1
002 The Blend
003 SIRIUS XM Love
004 40s on 4
005 50s on 5
Parental Lock
Category
Pop
SIRIUS
7ch Enhancer
Select Cat / Ch
Lock / Unlock
9
Input
DSP
Channel
006 ’60s Vibrations
007 Totally ’70s
008 Big ’80s
009 The Pulse
010 The Bridge
Parental Lock
Category
Pop
SIRIUS
7ch Enhancer
Select Cat / Ch
Lock / Unlock
PIN:
SIRIUS
42 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information on the front panel display or on the GUI
screen.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display
or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73).
■ Front panel display
Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle
the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
display modes.
Back to “Channel”
Display example (Antenna)
y
• You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front
Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60).
• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a
space.
• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals,
“ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
■ GUI screen
Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.
a Channel number
b Search mode (page 39)
c Channel name, channel category, artist name,
song title, composer name
d Antenna reception level
y
• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it
is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen..
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
Channel
Channel number, channel name
Category
Channel category, channel number
Artist/Song
Artist name, song title, channel number
Composer
Composer name, channel number
Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number
DSP Program
Current sound field program (page 26)
Audio Decoder
Current audio decoder (page 28)
Antenna
SIRIUS
Ch 001
All Channel Search
Ch Name
Category
Artist
Song
Composer
SIRIUS Hits 1
Pop
Sanumemo
Road to India
Frankie Zipper
Input
DSP
SIRIUS
Straight Enhancer
Option Menu
Hold Data
a
b
c
d
43 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 17), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied
remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this
unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 28).
Notes
• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using
the YDS-11.
y
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see the “iPod” section on page 74.
• (U.S.A. model only)
Once the connection between an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature and this unit is complete, this unit transmits iTunes Tagging information to the
iPod (page 32).
You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod
universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The
operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the
video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple
remote mode).
When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform
the following operations with the remote control.
You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,
etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying
the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control
your iPod in this mode.
You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod
using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your
iPod in this mode.
y
• “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the
input source.
2 Press tDISPLAY on the remote control.
The following screen appears on the GUI screen.
3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or
“Videos” and then press jCursor h.
• Select “Music” to browse music files.
• Select “Videos” to browse video files.
Note
• The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and
Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.
Using iPod™
Controlling iPod™
Key Function
j
ENTER Subsequent menu
k Menu up
n Menu down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
k
w Search backward (Press and hold)
f Search forward (Press and hold)
a Skip forward
b Skip backward
s Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
t DISPLAY
Switch between Menu browse mode and
Simple remote mode
Controlling iPod in simple remote mode
Controlling iPod in menu browse mode
Input
DSP
Music
Videos
iPod
DOCK
STRAIGHT
44 En
Using iPod™
4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a
menu item and then press jENTER to start
playback.
Menu items of “Music”
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
Menu items of “Videos”
Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your
iPod.
■ Play information display
a Shuffle and repeat icons
b (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and
(search backward)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time
e Song title, artist name, album title
y
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing DINFO (or fINFO).
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the
iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback.
1 Press tDISPLAY to switch to menu browse
mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input
source.
2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 48).
3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat” and then press jENTER.
4 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.
• Select “Albums” to play back albums in random
order.
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each song.
• Select “All” to repeat all songs.
To return to the previous screen, press jRETURN.
y
• When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen.
• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the
GUI screen.
Input
DSP
a
c
b
e
d
Made-to-order
Frankie Zipper
Road to India
Song
Artist
Album
01:04 –02:27
DOCK
Straight
Shuffle/repeat playback
1
45 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of
this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without
wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance.
Note
• This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.
“Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth
component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must
be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit
for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted.
y
• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the
Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with
which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary,
refer to the other component’s operating instructions.
■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver and your Bluetooth™ component
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)
as the input source.
2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
For details on operation of the Bluetooth component,
refer to the manual supplied with it.
3 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed
(page 48).
4 Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and
then press jENTER.
“Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts.
y
• To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.
• You can also start pairing operation by holding down
EMEMORY on the front panel.
5 Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA”
(example) appears in the Bluetooth device list.
6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass
key “0000” into the Bluetooth component.
When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on
the front panel display.
y
• The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to
eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data
for the least recently used other component is cleared.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)
as the input source.
2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
3 Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and
then press jENTER.
After you execute “Connect”, communication with
the Bluetooth component is established. When the
connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT
Connected” appears on the front panel display.
y
• When you press jENTER on the remote control, the connected
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found”
appears on the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the
Bluetooth component, display the Option menu again, select
“Disconnect” and then press jENTER.
4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component.
Using Bluetooth™ components
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver and your Bluetooth
component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
Input
DSP
Volume Trim
Connect
Pairing
Option Menu
BLUETOOTH
7ch Enhancer
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
46 En
You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB
memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB
mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs).
Notes
• You can play back only the files stored in the first partition.
• Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices.
1 Connect your USB storage device to the
VUSB port on the front panel (page 18).
2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dUSB) to select “USB” as the input source.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
If you have connected the USB storage device to this
unit before, playback of the music file played at the
last time automatically starts.
3 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a
music file to play back.
• To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n.
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or
jENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press j l.
4 Press jENTER to start play back.
You can also perform the following operations with
remote control.
■ Play information display
a Shuffle and repeat icons
b (playback)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
d Elapsed time
e Song title, artist name, album title
y
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
1 Press rOPTION on the remote control
while “USB” is selected as the input source.
The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 48).
2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat” and then press jENTER.
3 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “On” to play back music files in random
order.
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each music file.
• Select “All: to repeat all music files in the folder.
y
• When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen.
• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the
GUI screen.
4 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.
Using USB storage devices
Playback of the USB storage device
Key Function
k
a Skip forward during playback
b Skip backward during playback
s Stop
p Play
Input
DSP
Road to India
Symphony 01
Symphony 02
Symphony 03
Take–Her o
USB
USB
Straight Enhancer
Shuffle/repeat playback
Input
DSP
a
c
d
b
e
00:30
Made-to-order
Frankie Zipper
Road to India
Song
Artist
Album
USB
Straight Enhancer
1
47 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source.
Press qSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of
time.
Each time you press qSLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the
front panel display lights up.
Press qSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until
“Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display.
You can operate the following functions of this unit with
the remote control of your TV when connecting this unit
and the TV (HDMI control function supported) with
HDMI.
• Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with
TV)
• Adjusting the volume
• Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or
TV)
y
• The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA
Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player.
• If you connect this unit and your DVD player, Blu-ray player or HD
DVD player (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can
also control the device.
• We suggest that you use products (TV, DVD player, Blu-ray player or
HD DVD player) from the same manufacturer.
1 Turn on all devices connected to this unit
with HDMI.
For details, refer to the manual supplied with your
device.
2 Enable the HDMI control function on each
device.
For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 59).
For external devices, refer to the manual supplied
with each device to enable the HDMI control
function.
y
• You do not need to perform steps 1 through 2 from the next time.
3 Turn off the TV.
Other HDMI control devices are also turned off in
conjunction with the TV. If not, turn off them
manually.
4 Turn on the TV.
Other HDMI control devices are also turned on in
conjunction with the TV. If not, turn on them
manually.
5 Select this unit as the input source of the TV.
6 Turn on the HDMI control device (DVD player
or Blu-ray player) connected to this unit.
For this unit, check that the DVD player or Blu-ray
player is selected as an input source of this unit. If
not, select it as an input source.
For external devices, check that the TV screen shows
the playback picture of the player.
7 Check if the HDMI control function works
(turn on this unit or adjust the volume level
using the remote control of the TV).
Note
<Note>
• In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the
followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV
may be effective.
– “HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit.
– The HDMI control function is enables on the TV.
y
• This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 23) when you
select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the
remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output
jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can
enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon.
Other functions
Using the sleep timer
Using the HDMI™ control function
Please refer to the manual supplied with your TV and
check the following.
– The HDMI control function is enabled on your TV.
– This unit is appropriately connected to your TV.
Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.
Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off
48 En
ADVANCED OPERATION
This unit has an Option menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure
for setting the Option menu items is described below.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dInput selection key) to select the
desired input source.
2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for the selected input source is
displayed. For details about the Option menu items of
each input source, see “Option menu items” on this
page.
3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired
menu item and then press jENTER.
Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed.
4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the
desired setting and then press jENTER
5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.
To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.
Note
• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after
closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to
select the current input source again.
The following menu items are provided for each input
source.
Details of the menu items are as follows:
y
• The default settings are marked with “*”.
Volume Trim
Reduces any change in volume when switching input
sources by correcting volume differences between input
sources.
You can set this parameter for each input source.
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
Input
DSP
Volume Trim
Decoder Mode
Extended Surround
Signal Info
Option Menu
HDMI 1
Straight
Option menu items
Input
Source
Menu item
HDMI1-4 Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
Extended
Surround
Signal Info
AV1-4 Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
Extended
Surround
Signal Info
AV 5-6 Volume
Trim
AUDIO1/2 Volume
Trim
Video Out
V-AUX Volume
Trim
PHONO Volume
Trim
USB Volume
Trim
Signal Info Shuffle Repeat
iPod (DOCK) Volume
Trim
Shuffle Repeat
BLUETOOTH
(DOCK)
Vo l u m e
Trim
Connect/
Disconnect
Pairing
TUNER Volume
Trim
Audio
Mode
Auto
Preset
Clear
Preset
SIRIUS Volume
Trim
Clear
Preset
Parental
Lock
XM Volume
Trim
Clear
Preset
MULTI CH Volume
Trim
Video Out
Input source: All
Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB
(in 0.5 dB steps)
49 En
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Decoder Mode
Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.
Extended Surround
Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are
used.
Signal Info
Displays information on audio and video signals on the
GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items
to be displayed using jCursor k / n.
• Audio information
•
Notes
• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed
when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input.
• The bit rate may vary during playback.
• Video information
•
• HDMI error message
(appears only when an error has occurred)
•
Audio Mode
Sets FM (or HD Radio) broadcasting receiving mode.
Note
• (U.S.A. model only)
Select “Auto” to tune into HD Radio stations. When “Mono” is selected,
you can tune into analog stations only.
Auto Preset
Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers
them as preset stations (page 30).
y
• (U.S.A. model only)
Automatically detects FM and AM HD Radio stations and analog FM
radio stations and registers them as preset stations.
Clear Preset
Clears preset station (TUNER: page 31, XM: page 36,
SIRIUS: page 40).
Parental Lock
Set the Parental Lock (page 41).
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4
Choices: Auto*, DTS
Auto Automatically selects audio input signals.
DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals
are not reproduced.
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4
Choices: Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off
Auto Automatically selects the most suitable
decoder according to whether a flag for
reproducing surround back channel is present,
and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-
channel.
PLIIx
Movie
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-
channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder
whether or not surround back channel signals
are contained. You can select this parameter
when two surround back speakers are
connected.
PLIIx
Music
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-
channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are
contained. You can select this parameter when
one or two surround back speakers are
connected.
EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable
decoder for input signals whether or not the
flag for reproducing surround back channel is
present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-
channel.
Off Always reproduces original signals whether or
not the flag for reproducing surround back
channel is present.
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, USB
Format
Format of digital audio signals.
Channel
The number of input signal channels
(front/surround/LFE).
For example, if input signal channels are
3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE,
“3/2/0.1” is displayed.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as
the above, a total number of channels
such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.
Sampling
Frequency
The sampling frequency per second in
analog-to-digital conversion.
Bitrate
The bit rate of input signal per second.
Video In
Format and resolution of video input
signal.
Video Out
Format and resolution of video output
signal.
Message
Error messages about HDMI signals and
HDMI components. See the following for
details of the error messages.
HDCP Error
HDCP authentication failed.
Device Over
The number of HDMI components
connected is over the limit.
Out of Res.
The connected monitor is not compatible
with the video input signal.
Input source: TUNER
Choices: Auto*, Mono
Auto Receives in stereo mode by priority.
Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get a
better reception in monaural mode.
Input source: TUNER
Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS
Input source: SIRIUS
50 En
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
Shuffle
Changes the shuffle playback style.
Repeat
Changes the repeat playback style.
Connect / Disconnect
Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component.
Pairing
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component
(page 45).
Video Out
Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio
reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to
be output during an audio reproduction” on this page.
This function enables this unit to output video signals
when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is
selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below
to select the video to be output during an audio
reproduction.
1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press
dInput selection key) to select “AUDIO
1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input
source.
2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for the selected input source is
displayed.
3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out”
and then press jENTER.
4 Press jCursor l / h to select a video input
jack to be used during an audio
reproduction.
– AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
– AV3-6 (VIDEO)
– V-AUX (VIDEO)
– Off (no video output)
5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.
Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB
Choices: iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums
USB: Off*, On
Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB
Choices: Off*, One, All
Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH
Choices: AV1 to AV6, V-AUX, Off*
Selecting a video signal to be output
during an audio reproduction
Video;;;;;;Off
51 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as
they are with the default parameters, you can arrange
sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions
of sources or rooms by setting the parameters.
y
• You cannot configure the parameters when “Memory Guard” is set to
“On” (page 61).
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
3 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then
press jENTER.
4 Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP
Parameter” and then press jENTER.
5 Press jCursor k / n to select “Program
Name” and then press jCursor l / h to
select a sound field program to edit.
6 Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to
edit and then press jCursor l / h to
change the setting.
For details on functions and adjustable ranges of the
sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters”
on this page.
y
• Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other sound field program
parameters.
7 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON
SCREEN.
y
• The default settings are marked with “*”.
DSP Level
Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect
to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field
effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as
follows.
• The effect sound is too soft.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound
field programs.
→Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull.
• The sound field effect is added too much.
→Reduce the effect level.
Dialogue Lift
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.
When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest.
The position gets higher as you increase the value.
Notes
• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to
“Presence” (page 57).
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue
position.
3D DSP
When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use
sound field programs in 3D mode.
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
Setting sound field parameters
To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field
program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select
“Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press
jCursor h again to execute the initialization or
jCursor l to cancel it.
Sci-Fi
PLIIx Movie
0dB
16ms
1.0
2ms
1.0
DSP Parameter
Program Name
Decode Type
DSP Level
P. Initial Delay
P. Room Size
Sur. Initial Delay
Sur. Room Size
Sound field parameters Set values
Sound field program
Sound field parameters
CINEMA DSP basic parameters
Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB
Choices: 0* to 5
Choices: On*, Off
The ideal dialogue
position
Move up to the ideal
dialogue position
52 En
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
Note
• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to
“Presence” (page 57).
■ Parameters for adjusting early-reflected
sound
Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay /
Sur. Back Initial Delay
Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected
sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high
reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a
dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as
you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field
or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined
by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection
surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the
attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is
created when the attenuation time is long.
y
• We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field
when you adjust the delay time.
■ Parameters for specifying room size
Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur.
Back Room Size
Produces different senses of sound expansion according to
room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music
hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until
when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus,
different senses of sound expansion can be created by
changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When
this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is
defined as twice larger than the original room size.
■ Parameters for defining attenuation
characteristics of early-reflected sound
Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back
Liveness
Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create
a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level)
as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a
low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value.
Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in
an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic
absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead
sound field is created when the attenuation time is short
while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation
time is long.
Sound field parameters for advanced
configurations
Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to
49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial
Delay)
Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0
Delay
Time
Level
Delay
Time
Level
Early-reflected
sound
Original source sound
Sound source
Reflecting
Small = 1ms Large = 99ms
Adjustable range: 0 to 10
Time
Level
Level
Time
Early
Source sound
Sound source
Small = 0.1 Large = 2.0
Time
Level
Small = 0 Large = 10
Time
Level
Source sound
Live
Dead
Large reflected
sound
Small reflected
sound
53 En
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound
Reverb Time
Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the
rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz
reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation.
Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the
value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a
natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time
longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or
shorter for a sound source or room with more echo.
Reverb Delay
Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference
between the beginning of the direct sound and the
beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value,
the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the
value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant
sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time.
Reverb Level
Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound
level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the
reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to
create more echo.
■ Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs
Decode Type
Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound
field programs.
Note
• You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field
programs.
– Mono Movie
– Sports
– Action Game
– Roleplaying Game
■ Parameter for 2ch Stereo
Direct
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the
input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
■ Parameters for 7ch Stereo
Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R
Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level /
Presence R Level
Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround
back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo
program. The available parameters differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s
Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms
Time Time
Small = 1.0s Large = 5.0s
Source sound
Rear reverberation
Rear
reverberation
Early reflections
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Sound source
Reverb Time Reverb Time
60dB 60dB
Time
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
(dB)
Reverb Delay Reverb Time
60dB
Adjustable range: 0 to100%
Parameters for certain sound field
programs
Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
Choices: Auto*, Off
Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and
tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”
tone controls are both set to 0 dB.
Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control.
Adjustable range: 0 to 100%
Time
Level
Source sound
Reverb Level
(dB)
54 En
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
■ Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch
Enhancer
Effect Level
Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.
When the high-frequency signals of the source is
emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To
reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”.
You can customize decoder effects by setting the
following parameters. For details about the types of
decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 28).
■ Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music
Panorama
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends
stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound
field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the
difference in level created by the software being played
back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround
sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative
and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
Center Width
You can spread the center sound toward left and right
according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for
outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,
or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.
■ Parameter for Neo:6 Music
Center Image
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to
the center channel to make the center channel more or less
dominant as necessary.
Choices: High*, Low
Decoder parameters
Choices: Off*, On
Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3
Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7
Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0
55 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.
For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages.
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Menu/Submenu Function Page
Speaker Setup Sets items for speakers.
56
Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers.
56
Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers.
56
Speaker Configuration Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the
connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
56
Speaker Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker.
58
Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between
speakers and the listening position.
58
Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics.
58
Test Tone Generates test tones.
58
Sound Setup Sets various items for sound outputs.
58
Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones.
58
Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals.
59
HDMI Auto Lipsync Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between
video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals.
59
Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto.
59
Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output.
59
Function Setup Sets various items for HDMI and display.
59
HDMI Sets various items for input sources.
59
HDMI Control Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports
the HDMI control function is connected with this unit.
59
Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the
HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby.
59
Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for
reproducing sound signals.
59
Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input
signals.
59
Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog
video input signals.
60
Display Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display.
60
Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display.
60
Front Panel Display Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display.
60
GUI Position Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video
monitor.
60
Volume Sets items for volumes.
60
Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the
minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.
60
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally
increased.
60
Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.
60
Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel
display.
61
Zone2 Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2.
61
Zone2 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally
increased.
61
Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.
61
56 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen
and front panel display.
GUI screen
Front panel display
In this section, procedures of setting menus using the
video monitor are described.
1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
2 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then
press jENTER.
The Setup menu appears on the video monitor.
3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired
menu then press jENTER.
Items of the selected menu are displayed.
Example (Function Setup)
y
• To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.
4 If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select
the desired submenu then press jENTER.
Example (Volume)
5 Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit
and then press jCursor l / h to change
the setting.
Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup”
take up a full screen. To display other items in
“Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n.
Example (Speaker Configuration)
y
• To configure other items, repeat step 5.
6 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON
SCREEN.
Note
• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after
closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to
select the current input source again.
You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of
adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO)
for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”
for manual adjustment.
y
• The default settings are marked with “*”.
Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to
obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on
positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic
characteristics or the room, which are automatically
measured. For details on operations, see page 20.
Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on
manually set parameters.
After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check
automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup”
menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if
necessary.
■ Speaker Configuration
Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of
speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound
reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs.
61
Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration.
61
Menu/Submenu Function Page
Basic operation of the Setup menu
Speaker Setup
Sound Setup
Function Setup
DSP Parameter
Memory Guard
Setup Menu
;SpeakerSetup
HDMI
Display
Volume
Input Rename
Zone2
Function Setup
Off
+16.5dB
Off
Volume
Adaptive DRC
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Speaker Setup
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Speaker Configuration
Front Speaker
LargeSmall
57 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:
“Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer
diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.
Extra Speaker Assignment
Selects the application for the EXTRA SP terminals.
Note
•
When setting “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, the surround back
channel signals for main output is separately output from other channels.
LFE / Bass Out
Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency
components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)
channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.
LFE channel signals
Low-frequency components of other channel signals
Front Speaker
Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers.
Note
• If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically
switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”.
Center Speaker
Sets the size of center speaker.
Surround Speaker
Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.
y
• When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Surround Back Speaker
Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.
y
• When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”,
“PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode
(page 28) are not available.
Choices: Zone2*, Presence, None
Zone2 Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the
speakers in the second zone.
Presence Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the
presence speakers.
None Disables the EXTRA SP terminals.
Choices: Subwoofer, Front, Both*
Parameter Subwoofer
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Subwoofer Output Not output Not output
Front Not output Output Not output
Both Output Not output Not output
Parameter Subwoofer
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Subwoofer [1] [2] [2]
Front Not output [3] [2]
Both [3] [4] [2]
[1] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,
the size of which is set to “Small”.
[2] Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers
are set to “Large”.
[3] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right
channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to
“Small”.
[4] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right
channels.
Choices: Small, Large*
Small Select this when small speakers are
connected. Low-frequency components of the
front left and right channels are output from a
subwoofer.
Large Select this when large speakers are
connected.
Choices: None, Small*, Large
None Select this when no center speaker is
connected. Center channel signals are spread
to front left and right speakers.
Small Select this when a small center speaker is
connected. Low-frequency components of
center channel are output from a subwoofer.
If a subwoofer is not connected they are
output from front speakers.
Large Select this when a large center speaker is
connected.
Choices: None, Small*, Large
None Select this when no surround speakers are
connected. Surround channel signals are
spread to front left and right speakers.
“Surround Back Speaker” automatically
switches to “None” when this is selected.
Small Select this when small surround speakers are
connected. Low-frequency components of
surround channels are output from a
subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected
they are output from front speakers.
Large Select this when large surround speakers are
connected.
Choices: None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2*
None Select this when no surround back speaker
are connected. Surround back channel signals
are output from the surround L/R speakers
and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,
they are output from the surround L/R
speakers and front speakers.
Large x 1 Select this when one large surround back
speaker is connected.
Small x 1 Select this when one small surround back
speaker is connected.
Large x 2 Select this when two large surround back
speakers are connected.
Small x 2 Select this when two small surround back
speakers are connected.
58 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Bass Crossover Frequency
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component
output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x
1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is
output from a subwoofer or front speakers.
If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover
frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover
frequency at the maximum.
Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are
lacking or unclear.
■ Speaker Level
Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the
sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the
listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending
on the number of speakers connected.
y
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears
instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.
• You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test
Tone” to “On” (on this page).
• If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control,
set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum.
■ Speaker Distance
Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so
that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at
the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of
each speaker.
Unit
FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR /
SWFR / PR.L / PR.R
y
• Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings
(page 56).
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears
instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.
■ Equalizer
Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic
equalizer.
EQ Type Select
Selects an equalizer type.
GEQ
Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic
equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust
signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.
To adjust the signal level within each range, press
jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while
“Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the
desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h
to adjust the signal level.
■ Test Tone
Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates
test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the
settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone.
You can set various items for sound outputs.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
reproducing bitstream signals.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,
160Hz, 200Hz
Choices: Normal*, Reverse
Normal Select this not to change the phase of your
subwoofer.
Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step)
Defaults: 0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R)
–1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)
Choices: feet (ft)*, meters (m)
feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in feet.
meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in meters.
Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)
Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L,
PR.R)
2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR)
2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)
Choices: Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off
Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in
“Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the
currently used parametric equalizer are
displayed below “Auto PEQ”.
GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER
to adjust the characteristics of the graphic
equalizer.
Off Not use a graphic equalizer.
Channels Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left,
Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround
Back Right
Choices: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz,
16kHz
Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step)
Choices: Off*, On
Off Not generate test tones.
On Generates test tones.
Sound Setup
Choices: Min/Auto, STD, Max*
Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for
low volume or a quiet environment, such as
at night, for bitstream signals except for
Dolby TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby
TrueHD signals based on input signal
information.
STD Sets the standard dynamic range
recommended for regular home use.
59 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Lipsync
Adjusts delay between video output and audio output.
HDMI Auto Lipsync
Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video
signals when a TV that supports an automatic lip-sync
function is connected to this unit.
Auto Delay
Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto
Lipsync” is set to “On”. The actual correction time is
displayed under in “Auto Delay” field and an offset time
set by the user in “Offset” field.
Manual Delay
Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when
the connected TV does not support the automatic lipsync
function or you set “HDMI Auto Lipsync” to “Off”.
You can set various items for HDMI and display.
You can set items for HDMI.
■ HDMI Control
Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a
component that supports the HDMI control function is
connected with this unit. When this parameter is set to
“On”, this unit output signals input from the HDMI 1-4
jacks to the video monitor even when this unit is on
standby.
y
• The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases
while this unit is on standby.
– when the HDMI control function is on
– when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of
power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this
unit.
■ Standby Through
Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the
HDMI 1-4 jacks to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is
on standby. When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit
output signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the video
monitor even when this unit is on standby.
y
• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
• To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input
sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks must be selected before
switching to standby.
• When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH
indicator lights up. In this state, this unit consumes up to 3 watts of power
even on standby.
■ Audio Output
Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input
from the HDMI 1-4 jacks.
Note
• Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV
vary depending on specifications of the monitor.
y
• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
■ Resolution
Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted
from analog video input signals and output from the
HDMI OUT jack.
Notes
• Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog
video signals cannot be upscaled.
• When a video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit,
this unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An
asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution.
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set
“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 65) and try
again.
Max Outputs sound without adjusting the
dynamic range of the input signals.
Choices: Off*, On
Off Select this when the connected TV does not
support the automatic lip-sync function or
you do not use the automatic lip-sync
function. Set the correction time in “Manual
Delay”.
On Select this when the connected TV supports
the automatic lip-sync function. Fine adjust
the correction time in “Auto Delay”.
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
Function Setup
HDMI
Choices: On, Off*
On Enables the HDMI control function.
Off Disables the HDMI control function.
Choices: On, Off*
On Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT
jack.
Off Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Choices: Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV
Amplifier Outputs HDMI sound signals form the
speakers connected to this unit.
TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
speakers of a TV connected to this unit.
Sound output from the speakers connected to
this unit is muted.
Amplifier +
TV
Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
speakers connected to this unit and the
speakers of a TV connected to this unit.
Choices: Through*, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p
60 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
■ Aspect
Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images
reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT
jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog
video input signals by a video conversion function.
Notes
• You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set
to “Through”.
• This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.
• You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are
input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are
input.
You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel
display.
Dimmer
Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is
lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is
darkened.
Note
• The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode
even if the value is increased.
Front Panel Display Scroll
Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of
characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.
GUI Position
Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the
video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set
this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left),
set this value smaller.
You can set items for volumes.
■ Adaptive DRC
Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume
level. This feature is useful when you are listening at
lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,
the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range
When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range
y
• This setting is also effective for headphones.
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will
not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust
the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when
you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases
to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5
dB (default).
■ Initial Volume
Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when
this unit was set to standby is applied.
Note
• When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max
Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume”
to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is
automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on.
Choices: Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom
Through Outputs the video signals without changing
the aspect ratio.
16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on
the right and left sides of the TV screen.
Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and
left of images to fit on the TV screen.
Display
Adjustable range: –4 to 0*
Choices: Continuous*, Once
Continuous Repeatedly displays all characters by
scrolling.
Once Displays all characters by scrolling once,
halts scrolling and then displays first 14
characters.
Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5
Volume
Choices: Auto, Off*
Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)
Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
Volume : highVolume : low
Input levelInput level
Output level
Output level
Auto
Off Off
Auto
61 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Changes input source names to be displayed on the front
panel display.
Selecting a name to be displayed from templates
Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to
edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new
name from the following templates.
Entering an original name
Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to
edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters
by selecting one character at a time with the following key
operations.
The following characters are available for input.
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space
Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level
of Zone2.
y
• These parameters are available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment”
is set to “Zone2” (page 57).
■ Zone2 Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2, so that the
volume will not be accidentally increased. For example,
you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB
when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”.
■ Zone2 Initial Volume
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2 when the
power of Zone2 unit is turned on. When this parameter is
set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time when the
Zone2 unit was set to standby is applied.
Note
• If you set “Zone2 Max Volume” and “Zone2 Initial Volume”, the setting
of “Zone2 Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, if you set
“Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2 Initial Volume” to
“0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time
the Zone2 unit is turned on.
You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For
details, see page 51.
Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental
alteration.
Note
• When this parameter is switched to “On”, “ ” appears at the top left
corner of the Setup menu screen.
Input Rename
– Blu-ray – Satellite
– DVD – VCR
– SetTopBox – Tape
– Game – MD
– TV – PC
– DVR – iPod
– CD – HD DVD
– CD-R – “blank”
jCursor l / h Selects a character to edit.
jCursor k / n Selects a character to enter.
jENTER Enters a selected character.
Zone2
Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)
Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
DSP Parameter
Memory Guard
Choices: Off*, On
Off Not protect settings.
On Protects the Setup menu settings (except for
“Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and
“Memory Guard”).
62 En
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate
input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the
supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the
multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter
transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a
CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via
the infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a
multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2
connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks
of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these
products. Up to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog
mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see
“Transmitting/receiving remote control signals” (page 17).
Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and
other components to this unit as follows.
Note
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs
encoded in DTS.
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA
SP terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to
“Zone2” (page 57).
y
• You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP terminals as the front
speaker system of another zone.
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2 speakers, you can
adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume
of the Zone2 speakers (page 61).
Using multi-zone configuration
Only analog signal can be sent to the second zone. If you want to output sounds to Zone2, connect an external
component to the AV5-6, AUDIO1-2 or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you
want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this
unit by both HDMI and analog connections.
Connecting Zone2
Using an external amplifier
To the REMOTE IN jack
Infrared signal
emitter
DVD player (etc.)
Amplifier
Remote control
Second zone
(Zone2)
Main zone
This unit
From the ZONE2 OUT jacks
Infrared signal
receiver
From the REMOTE OUT jack
Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Important safety notice
The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be
connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
multiple speakers per channel could create an
abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier
damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance
information for all channels must be maintained at all
times. This information is found on the back panel of
your unit.
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
Second zone
(Zone2)
This unit
Main zone
63 En
Using multi-zone configuration
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can select and control Zone2 by using the control
keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
• Selecting the input source.
• Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is
selected as the input source)
• Tuning into the desired channel (when “XM” or
“SIRIUS” is selected as the input source) (U.S.A. model
only)
• Adjusting the volume of Zone2 (when Zone2 speakers
are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals).
Before controlling Zone2 by using the control keys on the
front panel or on the remote control, follow the procedure
below to switch this unit to the Zone2 operation mode.
■ To control Zone2 by using the front panel
control keys
Press CZONE2 CONTROL while Zone2 is
turned on.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes on the front panel display
for approximately 10 seconds.
Note
• Complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on the front
panel display. Otherwise, the Zone2 mode is automatically canceled and
this unit returns to the main zone operation mode.
■ To control Zone2 by using the remote control
Switch bMAIN/ZONE2 to the “ZONE2”
position.
■ Turning on or set Zone2 to standby
Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).
■ Operating Zone2
Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput
selection key) to select the desired input
source.
• Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2”, “V-
AUX” or “PHONO” to listen to the input source in
Zone2.
• Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features
(page 30) in Zone2.
• Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 46) in
Zone2.
• Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 43) or
Bluetooth features (page 45) in Zone2.
• Select “SIRIUS” to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
features (page 38) in Zone2.
• Select “XM” to use the XM Satellite Radio features
(page 34) in Zone2.
Controlling Zone2
Switching to the Zone2 operation mode
Operations in the Zone2 operation mode
ZONE
2
Flashes
64 En
You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for
controlling external components are as follows:
cSOURCE POWER
Turns on and off an external component.
jCursor, ENTER, RETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
kExternal component operation keys
Function as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
lNumeric keys
Function as numeric keys of an external component.
mTV control keys
tDISPLAY
Switches between the screens of external components.
y
• You can use mTV control keys only for controls of TV regardless
of selected input sources.
• You need to set the remote control code first to control external
components.
• The remote control keys for controlling external components are
available only when the external components have corresponding control
keys.
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
■ Default remote control code settings
“—” indicates no assignment
y
• An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically
selected according to selection of the scenes (page 23).
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
You should perform each step within 1 minute after the
previous step.
1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2 Press the desired dInput selection key.
3 Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered,
nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails,
nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from
step 1.
You can reset all remote control codes to the factory
default settings.
1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as a tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2 Press iON SCREEN.
3 Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”.
Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT
blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six
times. Repeat from step 1.
Controlling other components with the remote control
INPUT Switches visual inputs of TV
MUTE Mutes audio of TV
TV VOL +/– Controls the volume of TV
TV CH +/– Switches channels of TV
POWER Turns on and off TV
Input source Category Manufacturer
Default
code
[HDMI 1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018
[HDMI 2] — — —
[HDMI 3] — — —
[HDMI 4] — — —
[AV 1] ———
[AV 2] ———
[AV 3] CD Yamaha 5013
[AV 4] ———
[AV 5] ———
[AV 6] ———
[AUDIO 1] — — —
[AUDIO 2] — — —
[V-AUX] — — —
[PHONO] — — —
[USB] ———
[DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011
[TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007
[SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5017
[XM] Tuner Yamaha 5009
[MULTI]———
Setting remote control codes
Resetting all remote control codes
Input source Category Manufacturer
Default
code
65 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations
of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or
initialize user settings.
1 Set this unit to standby.
2 While holding down OSTRAIGHT on the
front panel, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
Keep holding down OSTRAIGHT until
“ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel
display.
3 Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to change.
The default setting are marked with “*”.
y
• Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an
actual display screen.
SP IMP. -XXX
Selects output impedance of this unit according to
connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm
speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”.
REMOTE ID -XXX
Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple
Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a
single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to
the same setting.
SR PIN -XXX
Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS
Satellite tuner.
BI AMP - XXX
Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main
speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.
SCENE IR -XXX
Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals
to an external component connected to the REMOTE
OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE
function is selected.
MON.CHK - XXXX
Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video
monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT
jack.
INIT-XXXXXXXXX
Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can
select an initialization method from the following.
DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field
programs
VIDEO Video conversion settings (resolution/
aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI
display position
ALL All
CANCEL Cancellation of initialization
4 Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this
unit to standby.
The settings you made are reflected next time you
turn on this unit.
You can check the firmware of this unit and update the
firmware using the USB port on the front panel.
Select the following parameter in step 3 above.
FIRM UPDATE
Updates the firmware of this unit. To update the firmware,
select “FIRM UPDATE” and then press OSTRAIGHT.
Notes
• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.
• Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating the
firmware.
VERXXX.XXX.XXX
Displays the firmware of this unit.
Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If
another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a
different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted
operation of the other amplifier.
“ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by
default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make
sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the
the advanced setup menu.
1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2 Press iON SCREEN.
Advanced setup
Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN*
Choices: ID1*, ID2
Choices: RESET, CANCEL*
Choices: ON, OFF*
Choices: ON*, OFF
Choices: YES*, SKIP
ADVANCEDSETUP
Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL*
Updating the firmware
Setting a remote control ID
66 En
Advanced setup
3 Enter the desired remote control ID code.
To switch to ID1:
Press lNumeric keys to enter “5019”.
To switch to ID2:
Press lNumeric keys to enter “5020”.
Once the remote control code is registered,
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat
from step 1.
y
• If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control
code of this unit) is set to “ID1”.
67 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
APPENDIX
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
Troubleshooting
General
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer is frozen due
to an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,
wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
—
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 65
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit and play the source again. —
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall
outlet.
19
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 65
(When this unit is turned back on and
“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The
protection circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on while a
speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit
and speakers are connected properly.
11
This unit cannot be
turned off.
The internal microcomputer is frozen due
to an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,
wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
—
No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected
on the video monitor.
Select an appropriate video input on the video
monitor.
—
The external video component is
connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks
while your video monitor is connected to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT
VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.
Connect the external video component to the video
input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect
the video monitor to the HDMI OUT jack.
14, 15
This unit outputs the video signals not
supported by the video monitor connected
to the HDMI OUT jack.
Displays the advanced setup menu and select
“VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.
65
Displays the advanced setup menu and set
“MON.CHK” to “YES”.
65
Video signals are input from a game
console while your video monitor is
connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
14
Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.
14
68 En
Troubleshooting
The picture is
disturbed.
The video software is copy-protected.
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
15
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput
selection key) to select the desired input source.
23
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11
The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. 23
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check
the input signal format.
If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback
component is properly connected to this unit (or a
proper input source is selected).
If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format
cannot be reproduced by this unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
82
“Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to
“TV”.
Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI →
Audio Output) to the other setting.
59
A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to
“Auto”.
48
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When a monaural source sound field
program is applied, sound of all channels
are output from the center speaker for
some surround decoders.
Try another sound field program. 26
The playback component or speakers are
not connected properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
12, 15
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel
display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off,
try the following.
1) Change the input source to another one.
2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not
output from that speaker. Select another sound field
program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on
this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup”
menu and enables output of that speaker.
6, 23, 26,
56
The volume of that speaker is set to
minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the
“Setup” menu.
Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and
adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level).
58
This unit is in the straight decode mode. Press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) to turn
off the straight decode mode.
29
Sound may not be output from certain
channels depending on input sources or
sound field programs.
Try another sound field program. 26
The speaker is malfunction. Check the speaker indicators on the front panel
display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check if sound is output.
If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
69 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a
Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is
being played.
Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”. 57
“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or
“Front” and a 2-channel source is being
played.
Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”. 57
The source does not contain low
frequency signals.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“Extended Surround” in the Option menu
is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not
contain a surround back flag with
“Extended Surround” set to “Auto”.
Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”. 49
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not set to
output the desired digital audio signals.
Set the playback component properly referring to its
operating instructions.
—
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this
unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback
component to this unit by digital connection and play
back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback
component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip
operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option
menu after selecting the input source and set
“Decoder Mode” to “DTS”.
15, 49
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power of the component. 64
“Memory Guard!” is
displayed and the
setting cannot be
changed.
“Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to
“On”.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to other digital or
radio frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment. —
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
70 En
Troubleshooting
HDMI™
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —
The connected HDMI component does not
support high-bandwidth digital copyright
protection (HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 82
Tuner (FM/AM)
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
You are too far from the station
transmitter or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Check the antenna connections. 18
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
—
Switch to monaural mode. 49
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a station or
an input from the antenna is weak.
Replace an outdoor antenna with more
sensitive multi element antenna.
—
Tune in manually or by direct frequency
tuning.
30
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 18
Use the manual tuning method. 30
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Supplied AM loop antenna is not
connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even
if you use an outdoor antenna.
18
The noises may be caused by lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
18
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —
HD Radio™ Reception (U.S.A. model only)
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit cannot
receive the HD Radio
signals of the
selected radio station.
The radio station provides analog FM/AM
radio service only.
Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio
service.
32
The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. —
Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. —
“Audio Mode” in the Option menu is set
to “Mono”.
Set “Audio Mode” to “Auto”. 49
71 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.
In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
This unit cannot
select other audio
programs than the
main program.
The radio station provides one audio
program only.
HD Radio information
does not appear.
The radio station does not provide the
information.
iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only)
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Tag data cannot be
transferred to your
iPod when it is station
in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock (YDS-
10).
“YDS-10” does not support tag file
transfer.
Use “YDS-11” to transfer tag data from this unit to
your iPod.
—
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Insufficient Data Tag data is not saved because of invalid
data.
The selected HR Radio program (or song being
played) does not support the iTunes Tagging feature.
—
Tag Already Stored Tag data for the same content has been
already saved.
Tag Storage full Tag data cannot be stored because the
internal memory of this unit is full.
Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock
(YDS-11) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit.
—
iPod full
Tags cannot be stored
Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod
because the HDD space of your iPod is
full.
Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make
room and try again.
—
Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your
iPod.
Check if the iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock (YDS-11) properly.
—
Storing Tag Tag data is being stored in the internal
memory of this unit.
Transferring Tag data is being transferred to your iPod.
Tag(s)Sent Tag data has been transferred to your
iPod.
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM
Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected
to this unit.
Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the
dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
cable is connected to this unit.
34
72 En
Troubleshooting
CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM
antenna cable has become damaged.
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the
antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if
the cable is damaged.
34
LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or
program information from the XM
satellite signal. This message can also
occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note
that this unit may not respond to some
operations while this message is
displayed.
This message should disappear in a few seconds in
good signal conditions. If you see this message often,
reposition the XM antenna to get better signal
reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front
panel display or XM information on the GUI screen
to check the antenna reception level.
37
NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the
XM satellite signal. Something may be
blocking the XM antenna’s view of the
satellites or the antenna is not properly
aimed.
Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the
XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
“Antenna” information on the front panel display or
XM information on the GUI screen to check the
antenna reception level. See instructions supplied
with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna
installation information.
37
CHANNEL OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not
currently broadcasting.
Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select
another channel.
—
CHANNEL NOT
AUTHORIZED
You may be attempting to tune to an XM
channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your XM subscription
package.
Consult the latest channel guide at
http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of
channels. For information on receiving this channel,
visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM
Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346.
—
CHANNEL NOT
AVAILABLE
The selected channel is not available. The
channel may have been reassigned to a
different channel number. This message
may occur initially with a new XM Mini-
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not
received XM’s signal for an extended
period.
Consult the latest channel guide at
http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of
channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an
XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for
an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to
receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes
and then try to select the channel again.
—
UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit has detected a XM CNP1000
which is not compatible with this unit.
If you have connected the XM Mini-Tuner
(CNP2000) and see this message, set this unit to
standby, disconnect and reconnect the XM Mini-
Tuner Home Dock and re-install the Mini-Tuner in
the Home Dock and turn on this unit.
If you continue to see this message with the XM
Mini-Tuner, contact XM Satellite Radio at
http://xmradio.com/ or 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-
967-2346).
If you have an incompatible XM CNP1000, contact
XM for information on upgrading to the XM Mini-
Tuner.
—
- - - - No artist name or song title is available for
this selection.
No action required. —
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
73 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.
In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the
SiriusConnect tuner properly.
Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.
38
SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the
SiriusConnect tuner.
The message disappears normally within several tens
of seconds.
—
CHECK SIRIUS
TUNER
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and
this unit.
38
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to
the AC wall outlet.
38
NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit
supports,
38
ACQUIRING SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information
on the front panel display or SIRIUS information on
the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level.
42
UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
channel list.
Wait until the updating is complete. —
The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.
38
F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
firmware.
Wait until the updating is complete. —
CALL 888-539-SIRIUS
TO SUBSCRIBE
The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the
selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
38
Select another channel. 38
SUBSCRIPTION
UPDATED
The subscription information is updated.
INVALID CHANNEL The selected channel is currently out of
service.
Select another channel. 38
Not Available The operation you made is not available.
74 En
Troubleshooting
Note
• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod
(page 17).
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees
offaxis from the front panel.
9
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe
light, etc.) is striking the remote control
sensor of this unit.
Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. —
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9
The remote control ID of the remote
control and this unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the
remote control.
65
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
64
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
64
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,
do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD disc menu
operation: press the dInput selection keys on
the remote control again.
When the key does not work during Option menu or
Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for
the current menu operation again.
—
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
iPod™
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
17
Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock
and then place it back in the dock.
43
Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Use an iPod supported by this unit. —
iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the
Yamaha iPod universal dock.
75 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock.
43
Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Bluetooth™
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of establishing the connection.
Completed The pairing is completed.
Canceled The pairing is canceled.
BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the
Bluetooth component is established.
Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver.
Not Found No Bluetooth components are found
during a pairing process.
Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and
your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check
whether your Bluetooth component is set to the
paring mode and then try again.
45
No Bluetooth components are found
during a Bluetooth connection.
Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned
on and then try again.
45
Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters
(33 feet) of this unit and then try again.
45
USB
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The music files and
folder cannot be
browsed.
The music files and folders are stored the
locations other than the FAT area.
Place the music files and folders in the FAT area. —
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB storage
device.
—
This unit cannot recognize some
characters used in the file name or folder
name.
Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then
try again.
—
The USB storage
device cannot be
recognized.
The USB storage device is not compatible
with mass storage class (except USB
HDDs).
Use a USB storage device that is compatible with
mass storage class (except USB HDDs).
—
This unit does not recognize the USB
storage device properly.
Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
76 En
Troubleshooting
Notes
• If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.
• Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.
• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
USB Connected Your USB storage device is connected. —
Disconnected Your USB storage device has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB storage device.
—
This unit recognizes the USB storage
device as an illegal device.
Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19
Access Error This unit cannot access your USB storage
device.
Try another USB storage device. —
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB storage device to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage
device to the USB port of this unit.
18, 19
Try resetting your USB storage device. —
Unable to play The data is invalid. Try another USB storage device. —
Auto Setup (YPAO)
Before Auto Setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
20
Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —
Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61
During Auto Setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not
detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11
E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround
channels are detected.
Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11
E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/
R channels are detected.
Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11
E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal
is detected.
If you connect only one surround back speaker,
connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.
11
E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed
accurately due to loud ambient noise.
Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. —
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
When using surround back speakers, you need to
connect surround L/R speakers.
11
77 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was
unplugged during the “Auto Setup”
procedure.
Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto
Setup”.
20
E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not
detect test tones.
Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 20
Check whether the speakers are properly placed and
connected.
10, 11
The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC
jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha
dealer or service center.
—
E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was canceled due to an
inappropriate user operation.
Run “Auto Setup” again. 20
E-10:INTERNAL
ERROR
An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 20
After Auto Setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker.
If they are correct, the speakers work properly even
when this message is displayed.
12
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around
the listening position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all
speakers are placed in a similar environment.
—
Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 12
We recommended that you use speakers with the
same or similar specifications.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. —
W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected
during measurement with “Extra Speaker
Assignment” set to “Presence”.
Check the presence speaker connections and perform
measurement again. If presence speakers are not
connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to
other than “Presence”.
11, 57
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
78 En
■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term
that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and
video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and
video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this
synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section.
With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted
frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a
much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the
sound in some way.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated
into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the
chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this
system because each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with
component input jacks is required in order to output component
signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed
of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
■ Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up
from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification.
This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from
millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color
banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more
shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases
the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the
RGB or YCbCr color space.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels
(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital
provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the
system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate
moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible
than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum
to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-
channel sources.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-
around” effects.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for
high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,
and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray
Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete
channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital
Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology
enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right
channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.
There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and
“Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround
uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and
dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a
center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for
special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder
built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance
moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected
as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
Glossary
79 En
Glossary
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals
are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of
2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to
reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization
of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality
can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal
audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the
dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD
signals input from the HDMI jack.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-
channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with
all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to
the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD
video.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks
of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly
gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in
your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel
sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right,
and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This
unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-
channel format.
■ DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-
ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming.
In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio,
enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the
Internet while playing the main program.
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including
Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96
kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray
Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio
master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ FLAC
This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is
inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides
higher audio quality.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing
an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)
and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI
supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-
channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC
HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with
bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and
requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface
that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range
of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as
0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the
full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround
technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital
radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround
sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with
superior channel separation and localization of audio elements.
System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround
playback.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-
range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.
This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM
system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the
analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while
the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric
value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that
can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while
the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is
determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher
the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be
played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more
finely the sound level can be reproduced.
80 En
Glossary
■ “x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors
that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
81 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed
for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having
many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP
provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening
room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the
information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate
and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening
room.
■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm
for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each
sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows
you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any
surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even
possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a
compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of
low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance
of the overall sound system.
Sound field program information
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening
environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those
of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually
any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will
is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound
field processor.
82 En
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio
commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (page 16)
– digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals
directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD
DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
Information on HDMI™
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
83 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 120 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................140/175/205/250 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.25 dB
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.0 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small)
.................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT.................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AUDIO OUT
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less
AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT)
.............................................................................. 86 dB or more
AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)
............................................................................ 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front Speakers)
Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small)
..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).......................................................... 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type (Gray Back) ............................................... NTSC
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component ........................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off)
............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion: Off)
.................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range ......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply ..........................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
• Power Consumption ................................................... 400 W/500 VA
• Standby Power Consumption
(HDMI Control: Off, Standby Through: Off) ............ 0.2 W or less
(HDMI Control: On, Standby Through: On)
No Repeat................................................................ 1.2 W or less
Repeat......................................................................... 3 W or less
• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in)
• Weight .................................................................... 11.1 kg (24.5 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
84 En
■ Numerics
2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 27
3D DSP, sound field parameter ..................... 51
5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10
6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10
7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10
7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 28
7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28
■ A
Action Game, sound field program ............... 27
Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 60
Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 24
Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 24
Advanced setup .............................................. 65
Adventure, sound field program .................... 26
All Channel Search mode,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39
All Channel Search mode,
XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35
AM antenna connection ................................. 18
AM tuning ..................................................... 30
Analog audio jack .......................................... 13
ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5
Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 60
AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5
Audio and video player connection ............... 15
Audio jack ..................................................... 13
AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack,
front panel ................................................... 4
Audio Mode, Option menu ............................ 49
AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5
Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 59
Audio player connection ................................ 16
Auto Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............... 59
Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 49
Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 76
Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 56
Automatic setup ............................................. 20
AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5
AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5
■ B
Basic operation, Setup menu ......................... 56
Bass Crossover Frequency, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 58
BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 65
Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12
Bluetooth component playback ..................... 45
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connection ................................................. 17
Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 75
■ C
Category Search mode,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39
Category Search mode,
XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35
Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 27
Center Image, decoder parameter .................. 54
Center Level, sound field parameter .............. 53
Center speaker ............................................... 10
Center Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 57
Center Width, decoder parameter .................. 54
Chamber, sound field program ...................... 27
Changing information on the front panel
display ....................................................... 25
CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 29
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator,
front panel display ...................................... 6
CINEMA DSP indicator,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 49
COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13
CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13
Connect, Option menu ...................................50
Connecting audio and video player ................15
Connecting audio player ................................16
Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver ......................................................17
Connecting external amplifier ........................17
Connecting external decoder ..........................16
Connecting FM antenna .................................18
Connecting iPod universal dock ....................17
Connecting multi-format player .....................16
Connecting power cable .................................19
Connecting projector ......................................14
Connecting set-top box ..................................15
Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ....................38
Connecting speaker ........................................11
Connecting speaker cable ...............................12
Connecting TV monitor .................................14
Connecting USB storage device ....................18
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ......34
Connecting Zone2 ..........................................62
Connections ....................................................10
Controlling other component,
remote control ...........................................64
Controlling Zone2 ..........................................63
Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6
Cursors
// /
k n l h,
remote control .............................................7
■ D
Decode Type, sound field parameter .............53
Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................49
Decoder parameter .........................................54
Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter .............51
Dimension, decoder parameter .......................54
Dimer, Display, Function Setup .....................60
Direct number access,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................39
Direct number access, XM Satellite Radio ....35
Direct, sound field parameter .........................53
Disconnect, Option menu ...............................50
DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7
Displaying HD Radio information .................33
Displaying input signal information ..............25
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information ................................................42
Displaying XM Satellite Radio
information ................................................37
DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5
Drama, sound field program ..........................27
DSP Level, sound field parameter .................51
DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................61
Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................58
■ E
Editing sound field program ..........................51
Editing surround decoder ...............................51
Effect Level, sound field parameter ...............54
ENTER, remote control ...................................7
EQ Type Select, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ............................................58
Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......58
Extended Surround, Option menu ..................49
External amplifier connection ........................17
External component operation key ,
remote control .............................................7
External decoder connection ..........................16
Extra Speaker Assignment, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ............................................57
■ F
FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...................65
Firmware update ............................................65
FM antenna connection ..................................18
FM tuning .......................................................30
FM/AM (CATEGORY
/
l h),
front panel ...................................................4
Frequency tuning ............................................30
Front left speaker ...........................................10
Front panel ....................................................... 4
Front panel display .......................................... 6
Front Panel Display Scroll, Display,
Function Setup .......................................... 60
Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4
Front right speaker ......................................... 10
Front Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 57
Function Setup, Setup menu .......................... 59
■ G
GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 58
GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ......... 60
■ H
Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 27
Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 27
HD indicator, front panel display .................... 6
HD Radio ....................................................... 32
HD Radio key, remote control ......................... 7
HD Radio reception, troubleshooting ............ 70
HDMI Auto Lipsync, Lipsync,
Sound Setup .............................................. 59
HDMI control ................................................ 47
HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 59
HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6
HDMI information ......................................... 82
HDMI jack ..................................................... 13
HDMI OUT/HDMI IN 1-4 jack, rear panel ..... 5
HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4
HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 59
HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 70
Headphones, use ............................................ 25
Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 24
High frequency sound adjustment ................. 24
■ I
INFO, front panel ............................................ 4
INFO, remote control ...................................... 7
INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 65
Initial Delay, sound field parameter .............. 52
Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 60
Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 61
Input selection key, remote control ................. 7
INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4
Input signal information display .................... 25
Input source registration, SCENE function ... 24
Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9
iPod playback ................................................ 43
iPod universal dock connection ..................... 17
iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 74
iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ............................ 32
iTunes Tagging, troubleshooting ................... 71
■ L
LFE / Bass Out, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 57
Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 59
Liveness, sound field parameter .................... 52
■ M
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4
MAIN/ZONE2, remote control ....................... 7
Manual Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ........... 59
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 56
Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 60
Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 61
MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4
MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 65
MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5
Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 27
Movie, sound field program .......................... 26
MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5
Multi information display,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Multi-format player connection ..................... 16
Multi-zone configuration ............................... 62
Index
Index
85 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Music Video, sound field program .................27
MUTE indicator, front panel display ...............6
MUTE, remote control .....................................7
■ N
Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ..................................28
Neo:6 Music, decoder ....................................28
Neural Sur., decoder .......................................28
Numeric key, remote control ............................7
■ O
ON SCREEN, remote control ..........................7
OPTICAL jack ...............................................13
OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4
Option menu ...................................................48
OPTION, remote control ..................................7
■ P
P. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ...........52
P. Liveness, sound field parameter ................52
P. Room Size, sound field parameter .............52
Pairing Bluetooth components .......................45
Pairing, Option menu .....................................50
Panorama, decoder parameter ........................54
Parental Lock, Option menu ..........................49
PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4
PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5
Placing speaker ...............................................10
PLII Game, decoder .......................................28
PLII Movie, decoder ......................................28
PLII Music, decoder .......................................28
PLIIx Game, decoder .....................................28
PLIIx Movie, decoder ....................................28
PLIIx Music, decoder .....................................28
Power cable connection ..................................19
Power cable, rear panel ....................................5
POWER, remote control ..................................7
PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5
Presence L Level, sound field parameter .......53
Presence left speaker ......................................11
Presence R Level, sound field parameter .......53
Presence right speaker ....................................11
PRESET
/
l h, front panel .........................4
Preset Search mode,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................40
Preset Search mode, XM Satellite Radio .......36
Preset tuning ...................................................30
Pro Logic, decoder .........................................28
PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4
Projector connection .......................................14
PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4
■ R
Rear panel .........................................................5
Receiving remote control signal .....................17
Registering input source, SCENE function ....24
Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel ......................................................40
Registering sound field program, SCENE
function ......................................................24
Registering XM Satellite Radio channel ........36
Remote control .................................................7
Remote control code resetting ........................64
Remote control code setting ...........................64
Remote control ID setting ..............................65
Remote control signal transmitter,
remote control .............................................7
Remote control,
controlling other component .....................64
Remote control, preparation .............................9
Remote control, troubleshooting ....................74
Remote control, use ..........................................9
REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................65
REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5
Repeat playback, iPod ....................................44
Repeat playback, USB storage device ...........46
Repeat, Option menu ......................................50
Resetting remote control code ........................64
Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ...............59
RETURN, remote control ................................ 7
Reverb Delay, sound field parameter ............ 53
Reverb Level, sound field parameter ............. 53
Reverb Time, sound field parameter ............. 53
Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 27
Room Size, sound field parameter ................. 52
■ S
SCENE function ............................................ 23
SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 65
SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4
SCENE, remote control ................................... 7
Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 26
Selecting a source on GUI screen .................. 24
Selecting SCENE ........................................... 23
Setting Parental Lock,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 41
Setting remote control code ........................... 64
Setting remote control ID .............................. 65
Setup menu .................................................... 55
Setup menu basic operation ........................... 56
Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 44
Shuffle playback, USB storage device .......... 46
Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 50
Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 49
SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 29
SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6
SIRIUS jack, rear panel ................................... 5
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 38
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting .......73
SLEEP indicator, front panel display ..............6
Sleep timer ..................................................... 47
SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7
Sound field parameter .................................... 51
Sound field program editing .......................... 51
Sound field program registration,
SCENE function ....................................... 24
Sound selection keys, remote control .............. 7
Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 58
SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7
SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 65
Speaker cable connection .............................. 12
Speaker Configuration, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 56
Speaker connection ........................................ 11
Speaker Distance, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 58
Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6
Speaker layout ............................................... 10
Speaker Level, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 58
Speaker placement ......................................... 10
Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 56
SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5
Specifications ................................................. 83
Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 26
Sports, sound field program ........................... 27
SR PIN, advanced setup ................................ 65
Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 59
Staright decode mode .................................... 29
Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 28
STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4
Subwoofer ...................................................... 10
Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 58
Sur. Back Initial Delay,
sound field parameter ................................ 52
Sur. Back Liveness, sound field parameter ... 52
Sur. Back Room Size,
sound field parameter ................................ 52
Sur. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ....... 52
Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ............. 52
Sur. Room Size, sound field parameter ......... 52
Surround back left speaker ............................ 10
Surround Back Level,
sound field parameter ................................ 53
Surround back right speaker .......................... 10
Surround back speaker ................................... 10
Surround Back Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 57
Surround decoder editing ............................... 51
Surround L Level, sound field parameter ...... 53
Surround left speaker .................................... 10
Surround R Level, sound field parameter ..... 53
Surround right speaker .................................. 10
Surround Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 57
■ T
TAG indicator, front panel display ................. 6
Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..... 58
The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 27
The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ....... 27
Tone control .................................................. 24
TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4
TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7
Transmitting remote control signal ............... 17
TRIGGER OUT jack, rear panel ..................... 5
Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting ................. 70
Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6
Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7
Tuning, AM ................................................... 30
Tuning, FM .................................................... 30
TUNING/CH
/
l h, front panel ................ 4
Turning off .................................................... 19
Turning on ..................................................... 19
TV control key, remote control ....................... 7
TV monitor connection ................................. 14
■ U
Updating firmware ........................................ 65
USB port, front panel ...................................... 4
USB storage device connection ..................... 18
USB storage device playback ........................ 46
USB, troubleshooting .................................... 75
■ V
VER, advanced setup .................................... 65
VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ........ 4
VIDEO jack ................................................... 13
Video jack ..................................................... 13
Video Out, Option menu ............................... 50
Video/audio jack ........................................... 13
Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 29
VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7
VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4
VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6
Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 48
Volume, Function Setup ................................ 60
■ X
XM indicator, front panel display ................... 6
XM jack, rear panel ......................................... 5
XM Satellite Radio tuning ............................. 34
XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ............. 71
■ Y
YPAO ............................................................ 20
YPAO, troubleshooting ................................. 76
■ Z
ZONE2 CONTROL, front panel ..................... 4
ZONE2 indicator, front panel display ............. 6
Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone2,
Function Setup .......................................... 61
Zone2 Max Volume, Zone2,
Function Setup .......................................... 61
ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4
ZONE2 OUT jack, rear panel ......................... 5
Zone2, Function Setup .................................. 61
“KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or
“pPOWER” (example)
indicates the name of the parts on
the front panel or the remote
control. Refer to “Part names and
functions” on page 4.
i
List of remote control codes
TV
A.R. Systems 0274
Acme 0260
Acura 0261, 0273
ADC 0259
Admiral 0100, 0224, 0257,
0258, 0259, 0264,
0265
Advent 0204
Adventura 0107
Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328
Agashi 0327, 0328
Agazi 0259
Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Aim 0274
Aiwa 0028, 0297
Akai 0063, 0096, 0101,
0205, 0231, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Akiba 0262, 0274
Akura 0259, 0262, 0273,
0274
Alaron 0327
Alba 0243, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0266, 0269,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0294, 0300, 0327
Albatron 0222
Alcyon 0249
Alleron 0105
Allorgan 0328
Allstar 0268, 0274
America Action
0225
AMOi 0326
Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275,
0328
Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262,
0273, 0274
Amtron 0104
Anam 0225, 0261
Anam National
0102, 0104
Anglo 0261, 0273
Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261,
0273, 0274
Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261,
0263, 0273, 0274
AOC 0072, 0090, 0096,
0103
Apex 0061, 0117, 0139
Arcam 0327, 0328
Arcam Delta 0260
Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274
Arthur Martin 0275
ASA 0257, 0265
Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274
Astra 0261
Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262,
0327, 0328
Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327
Atori 0261, 0273
Auchan 0275
Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328
Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225
Ausind 0249
Autovox 0249, 0257, 0259,
0260, 0328
Aventura 0097
Awa 0327, 0328
Axion 0206
Baird 0328
Bang & Olufsen
0230, 0257
Basic Line 0261, 0262, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0328
Bastide 0260, 0328
Baur 0271, 0274
Bazin 0328
Beko 0243, 0269, 0274,
0282, 0351, 0357,
0372, 0380
Belcor 0090
Bell & Howell
0065, 0100
Benq 0051, 0160, 0315
Beon 0268, 0271, 0274
Best 0243
Bestar 0243, 0268, 0274
Binatone 0260, 0328
Blue Sky 0262, 0274
Blue Star 0270
Boots 0260, 0328
BPL 0270, 0274
Bradford 0104, 0225
Brandt 0267, 0272
Brillian 0228
Brinkmann 0274
Brionvega 0257, 0268, 0271,
0274
Britannia 0260, 0327, 0328
Brockwood 0090
Broksonic 0063, 0225
Bruns 0257
BTC 0262
Bush 0261, 0262, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0270,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0282, 0286, 0294,
0300, 0328, 0329,
0351, 0388, 0394,
0413
Candle 0072, 0090, 0096,
0107
Capsonic 0259
Carena 0274
Carnivale 0096
Carrefour 0266
Carver 0088
Cascade 0261, 0273, 0274
Casio 0317
Cathay 0268, 0271, 0274
CCE 0229, 0328
Celebrity 0057, 0101
Celera 0117
Centurion 0268, 0271, 0274
Century 0257
CGE 0243, 0249
Changhong 0117
Chimei 0323
Cimline 0261, 0273
Citizen 0072, 0085, 0090,
0096, 0104
City 0261, 0273
Clarion 0225
Clarivox 0271
Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259,
0260, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0269, 0273,
0274, 0328
CMS 0327
CMS Hightec 0328
Coby 0151
Colortyme 0072, 0090
Commercial Solutions
0071
Concerto 0072, 0090
Concorde 0261, 0273
Condor 0243, 0260, 0268,
0269, 0273, 0274,
0327
Contec 0225, 0260, 0261,
0266, 0273, 0327
Contec/Cony 0094, 0104
Continental Edison
0267
Cosmel 0261, 0273
Craig 0104, 0225
Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249,
0257
Crown 0104, 0225, 0243,
0249, 0261, 0268,
0269, 0271, 0273,
0274
CS Electronics
0260, 0262, 0327
CTC Clatronic
0263
CTX 0159
Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072,
0085, 0088, 0090,
0096, 0099, 0224
CXC 0104, 0225
Cybertron 0262
Cytron 0202
Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090,
0103, 0119, 0245,
0260, 0261, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0281,
0285, 0303, 0321,
0327, 0328, 0344,
0361, 0387
Dainichi 0262, 0327
Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327, 0328
Dantax 0243, 0271
Dawa 0274
Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090,
0261, 0273
De Graaf 0264
Decca 0260, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
Dell 0167, 0195
Denver 0308, 0312
Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274
Diamant 0274
Diamond 0327
DiamondVision
0213, 0221
Dimensia 0099
Disney 0137
Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328
Dream Vision 0415, 0416
DTS 0261, 0273
Dual 0260, 0274, 0328
Dual-Tec 0260, 0261
Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108,
0257, 0260, 0263,
0328
Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133,
0225
Dux 0271
Dwin 0224
Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274
Dynex 0181, 0182
Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274,
0328
Elcit 0257
Electa 0270
ELECTRO TECH
0261
Electroband 0057, 0101
Electrograph 0226
Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101,
0102
Element 0180
Elin 0260, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0327
Elite 0262, 0268, 0274
Elman 0263
Elta 0261, 0273, 0327
Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077,
0082, 0085, 0090,
0094, 0095, 0097,
0104, 0105, 0119,
0225, 0243, 0257,
0274
Emprex 0200
Envision 0072, 0090, 0096
Epson 0156, 0201, 0309
Erres 0268, 0271, 0274
ESA 0097
ESC 0328
Etron 0261
Eurofeel 0328
Euro-Feel 0259
Euroline 0271
Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328
Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268,
0274
Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268,
0274, 0327, 0328
Expert 0275
Exquisit 0274
Fenner 0261, 0273
Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272
Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274,
0327
Filsai 0328
Finlandia 0264
Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260,
0263, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268
Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257,
0260, 0266, 0269,
0328
Flint 0268, 0274
Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258,
0260, 0271, 0327
Formenti/Phoenix
0327
Fortress 0257, 0258
Fraba 0243, 0274
Friac 0243
Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264,
0265, 0273, 0328
Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,
0105, 0328
Fujitsu General
0328
ii
Fujitsu Siemens
0425, 0426, 0427,
0428, 0429
Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0097,
0104, 0105, 0225,
0259
Futuretech 0104, 0225
Galaxi 0269, 0274
Galaxis 0243, 0274
Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227
GBC 0261, 0266, 0273
GE 0069, 0071, 0072,
0073, 0077, 0090,
0099, 0102, 0106,
0112, 0131
Geant Casino 0275
GEC 0260, 0265, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273
General Technic
0261, 0273
Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268,
0274
GFM 0177, 0210
Giant 0328
Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096,
0108
GoldHand 0327
Goldline 0274
GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085,
0090, 0094, 0096,
0103, 0243, 0260,
0261, 0264, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0322,
0328, 0395, 0399,
0412
Gorenje 0243, 0269
GPM 0262
GPX 0211
Gradiente 0162
Graetz 0265
Granada 0249, 0260, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0275, 0328
Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270,
0271
Gronic 0328
Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249,
0274, 0356
Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225
Haier 0187, 0207
Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327,
0328
Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090
Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328
Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260,
0261, 0266, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0328
Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274
Hantor 0274
Harman/Kardon
0088
Harvard 0104, 0225
Harwood 0273, 0274
Havermy 0224
HCM 0259, 0260, 0261,
0270, 0273, 0274,
0328
Hema 0273, 0328
Hewlett Packard
0146
Higashi 0327
HiLine 0274
Hinari 0261, 0262, 0266,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274
Hisawa 0262, 0270, 0275
Hisense 0165
Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0072,
0090, 0094, 0173,
0254, 0255, 0256,
0260, 0264, 0265,
0266, 0274, 0285,
0300, 0319, 0328,
0348, 0349, 0385,
0402, 0410
Hornyphon 0268, 0274
Hoshai 0262
Huanyu 0260, 0327
Hygashi 0260, 0327, 0328
Hyper 0260, 0261, 0273,
0327, 0328
Hypson 0259, 0260, 0268,
0270, 0271, 0274,
0275, 0328
Hyundai 0223
Iberia 0274
ICE 0259, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
ICeS 0327
Ilo 0198, 0203
IMA 0104
Imperial 0243, 0249, 0265,
0268, 0269, 0274
Indiana 0268, 0271, 0274
Infinity 0088
InFocus 0168, 0277, 0313,
0397, 0430
Ingelen 0265
Ingersol 0261, 0273
Initial 0203
Inno Hit 0249, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328
Innovation 0259, 0261
Insignia 0182, 0188, 0190,
0209
Inteq 0076
Interactive 0243
Interbuy 0261, 0273
Interfunk 0243, 0257, 0265,
0268, 0271, 0274
International 0327
Intervision 0243, 0259, 0260,
0263, 0274, 0328
Irradio 0249, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274
Isukai 0262, 0274
ITC 0260, 0328
ITS 0262, 0268, 0270,
0274, 0327
ITT 0261, 0265
ITV 0261, 0271, 0274
Janeil 0107
JBL 0088
JC Penney 0072, 0073, 0085,
0090, 0099, 0103,
0106
JCB 0057, 0101
Jensen 0072, 0090
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0092, 0093, 0094,
0106, 0251, 0252,
0266, 0268, 0293,
0360, 0379
Kaisui 0260, 0261, 0262,
0270, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Kamosonic 0260
Kamp 0260, 0327
Kapsch 0265
Karcher 0243, 0260, 0261,
0271, 0274
Kawasho 0072, 0090, 0101,
0327
KEC 0225
Kendo 0243, 0263, 0264,
0274
Kenwood 0072, 0090, 0096
KIC 0328
Kingsley 0260, 0327
KLH 0117
Kloss Novabeam
0104, 0107
Kneissel 0243, 0250, 0274
Kolster 0268, 0274
Konka 0262
Korpel 0268, 0271, 0274
Korting 0243, 0257
Kosmos 0274
Koyoda 0261
KTV 0085, 0096, 0104,
0225, 0229, 0260,
0328
Kyoto 0327, 0328
Lasat 0243
Lenco 0261, 0273
Lenoir 0260, 0261, 0273
Leyco 0259, 0268, 0271,
0274
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0077, 0103, 0145,
0222, 0243, 0246,
0253, 0260, 0261,
0264, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0282,
0290, 0299, 0316,
0327, 0328, 0351,
0359, 0367, 0382,
0384, 0389, 0396
LG/GoldStar 0246
Liesenk 0271
Liesenkotter 0274
Life 0259, 0261
Lifetec 0259, 0261, 0273,
0274
Lloyds 0273
Loewe 0243, 0250, 0274,
0280, 0306, 0347
Loewe Opta 0257, 0268, 0271
Logik 0100
Luma 0264, 0271, 0273,
0274
Lumatron 0264, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
Lux May 0268
Luxman 0072, 0090
Luxor 0260, 0264, 0328
LXI 0061, 0065, 0071,
0072, 0073, 0077,
0088, 0099
M Electronic 0260, 0261, 0265,
0267, 0268, 0271
MAG 0050
Magnadyne 0257, 0263, 0271
Magnafon 0249, 0260, 0263,
0327
Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090,
0091, 0095, 0096,
0098, 0114, 0115,
0129, 0134, 0176,
0178, 0189, 0210
Magnum 0259, 0261
Majestic 0100
Mandor 0259
Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090,
0096, 0158, 0268,
0271, 0274
Marelli 0257
Mark 0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Masuda 0328
Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328,
0405
Matsushita 0067
Maxent 0193, 0226
Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274
Medion 0259, 0261, 0274
Megapower 0222
Megatron 0072, 0077
MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Melvox 0275
Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077,
0100, 0103, 0133,
0219, 0261, 0273
Memphis 0261, 0273
Mercury 0273, 0274
Metz 0257
MGA 0072, 0077, 0090,
0096, 0103
Micromaxx 0259, 0261
Microstar 0259, 0261
Midland 0069, 0071, 0073,
0076, 0085, 0106,
0108
Minerva 0249
Minoka 0268, 0274
Mintek 0203
Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0072, 0077,
0090, 0103, 0196,
0224, 0257, 0266,
0268, 0274, 0298,
0371
Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250,
0260, 0327, 0328
Monivision 0222
Montgomery Ward
0100
Motion 0249
Motorola 0102, 0224
MTC 0072, 0090, 0096,
0103, 0243, 0327
Multi System 0271
Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229,
0243, 0260, 0261,
0263, 0264, 0266,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Murphy 0260, 0327
NAD 0061, 0072, 0077
Naonis 0264
NEC 0026, 0053, 0072,
0090, 0096, 0102,
0103, 0266, 0328
iii
Neckermann 0243, 0257, 0260,
0264, 0268, 0269,
0271, 0274, 0328
NEI 0268, 0271, 0274
Net-TV 0226
Neufunk 0273, 0274
New Tech 0261, 0268
New World 0262
NewTech 0273, 0274, 0328
Nicamagic 0260, 0327
Nikkai 0259, 0260, 0262,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Nikko 0072, 0077, 0096
Nobliko 0249, 0260, 0263,
0327
Nokia 0265
Norcent 0155
Nordic 0328
Nordmende 0257, 0265, 0267,
0268
Nordvision 0271
Novatronic 0274
Oceanic 0265, 0275
Okano 0243, 0269, 0274
Olevia 0052, 0140, 0149,
0154, 0157
ONCEAS 0260
Onwa 0104, 0225
Opera 0274
Oppo 0208
Optimus 0065, 0067
Optoma 0194
Optonica 0224
Orbit 0268, 0274
Orion 0121, 0192, 0261,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0282, 0329
Orline 0274
Osaki 0259, 0260, 0262,
0274, 0328
Oso 0262
Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266,
0268, 0270, 0271,
0274, 0328
Pael 0260, 0327
Palladium 0243, 0260, 0269,
0274, 0328
Palsonic 0328
Panama 0259, 0260, 0261,
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0066,
0067, 0068, 0069,
0070, 0102, 0106,
0113, 0147, 0215,
0241, 0265, 0274,
0279, 0310, 0332,
0334, 0368, 0374
Panavision 0274
Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260,
0275, 0327
Pausa 0261, 0273
Penney 0061, 0069, 0071,
0077, 0096
Perdio 0274, 0327
Perfekt 0274
Philco 0072, 0088, 0090,
0091, 0094, 0096,
0102, 0103, 0243,
0249, 0257, 0274
Philharmonic 0260, 0328
Philips 0040, 0088, 0089,
0090, 0091, 0094,
0098, 0099, 0102,
0114, 0135, 0143,
0176, 0178, 0189,
0210, 0212, 0232,
0233, 0257, 0260,
0268, 0271, 0274,
0278, 0287, 0301,
0302, 0307, 0311,
0314, 0330, 0331,
0333, 0337, 0338,
0339, 0341, 0343,
0345, 0355, 0363,
0365, 0377, 0378,
0381, 0383, 0406,
0409, 0414
Philips Magnavox
0089, 0114, 0115
Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0327
Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327
Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096
Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072,
0090, 0243, 0265,
0267, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0408
Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273,
0274
Playsonic 0328
Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184,
0220
Poppy 0261, 0273
Portland 0072, 0085, 0090,
0103
Prandoni-Prince
0249, 0264
Precision 0260, 0328
Prima 0161, 0207, 0261,
0265, 0273
Princeton 0222
Prism 0069, 0106
Profex 0261, 0273
Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274
Proline 0268, 0274
Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099
Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271,
0274, 0327, 0328
Protech 0259, 0260, 0261,
0263, 0268, 0271,
0328
Proton 0072, 0077, 0090,
0094
Protron 0150
PROVIEW 0050, 0164
Provision 0271, 0274
Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108
Pye 0268, 0271, 0274,
0296, 0338
Pymi 0261, 0273
Quandra Vision
0275
Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102,
0106
Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Questa 0266
Radialva 0274
RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077,
0096, 0225, 0274
RadioShack/Realistic
0072, 0085, 0090,
0094, 0099, 0104
Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
Radiomarelli 0257, 0274
Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273,
0274
Rank 0266
RCA 0071, 0072, 0073,
0074, 0075, 0090,
0099, 0102, 0103,
0109, 0120, 0179,
0218
Realistic 0065, 0077, 0096,
0225
Recor 0274
Redstar 0274
Reflex 0274
Revox 0243, 0268, 0271,
0274
Rex 0259, 0264, 0265
RFT 0243, 0250, 0257
Rhapsody 0327
R-Line 0268, 0271, 0274
Roadstar 0259, 0261, 0262,
0273
Robotron 0257
Rowa 0327, 0328
Royal Lux 0243
RTF 0257
Runco 0076, 0096, 0108
Saba 0257, 0265, 0267,
0272, 0376
Saisho 0259, 0260, 0261,
0273, 0328
Salora 0264, 0265
Sambers 0249, 0263
Sampo 0072, 0085, 0090,
0096, 0226
Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0072,
0077, 0084, 0085,
0086, 0087, 0090,
0094, 0096, 0103,
0118, 0217, 0229,
0235, 0236, 0237,
0243, 0259, 0260,
0261, 0268, 0269,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0284, 0295, 0327,
0328, 0336, 0346,
0390, 0407
Sandra 0260, 0327, 0328
Sansui 0063, 0121, 0268,
0274
Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0065, 0090,
0141, 0191, 0243,
0250, 0260, 0266,
0273, 0291, 0327,
0328, 0370, 0373,
0391
SBR 0271, 0274
Sceptre 0166, 0185
Schaub Lorenz
0265
Schneider 0260, 0262, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0287,
0300, 0328, 0364,
0366
Scotch 0072, 0077
Scott 0072, 0077, 0090,
0094, 0104, 0105,
0199, 0225
Sears 0061, 0065, 0071,
0072, 0073, 0077,
0088, 0090, 0097,
0099, 0105
SEG 0259, 0260, 0263,
0266, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0300, 0327,
0328
SEI 0274
SEI-Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0265
Seleco 0264, 0265, 0266
Sencora 0261, 0273
Sentra 0273
Serino 0327
Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,
0072, 0080, 0081,
0082, 0083, 0085,
0090, 0094, 0110,
0148, 0183, 0216,
0224, 0247, 0248,
0258, 0266, 0288,
0304, 0324, 0325,
0340, 0358, 0362,
0369, 0386, 0392,
0398, 0400, 0401,
0403
Sheng Chia 0224
Shogun 0090
Siarem 0257, 0263, 0274
Sierra 0268, 0274
Siesta 0243
Signature 0100
Silva 0327
Silver 0266
Singer 0257, 0263, 0275
Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0271,
0274
Skantic 0265
Solavox 0265
Sonitron 0243, 0328
Sonoko 0259, 0260, 0261,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0328
Sonolor 0265, 0275
Sontec 0243, 0268, 0271,
0274
Sony 0041, 0057, 0058,
0059, 0060, 0101,
0116, 0125, 0126,
0127, 0142, 0169,
0170, 0171, 0172,
0174, 0234, 0261,
0266, 0276, 0289,
0292, 0393, 0411
Sound & Vision
0262, 0263
Soundesign 0072, 0077, 0090,
0104, 0105, 0225
Soundwave 0268, 0271, 0274
Squareview 0097
SSS 0090, 0104, 0225
Standard 0260, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0273, 0274,
0328
Starlite 0104, 0225, 0271,
0273, 0274
Stenway 0270
Stern 0264, 0265
Strato 0273, 0274
Stylandia 0328
Sunkai 0261
Sunstar 0273, 0274
Sunwood 0261, 0268, 0273,
0274
Superla 0260, 0327, 0328
Superscan 0095, 0224
SuperTech 0273, 0274, 0327
Supra 0261, 0273
Supre-Macy 0107
Supreme 0057, 0101
Susumu 0262
Sutron 0261, 0273
SVA 0197
Sydney 0260, 0327, 0328
iv
Sylvania 0072, 0088, 0089,
0090, 0091, 0095,
0096, 0097, 0098,
0175, 0177, 0210
Symphonic 0097, 0104, 0108,
0133, 0210, 0225
Syntax 0149
Syntax-Brillian
0149
Sysline 0271
Sytong 0327
Tandy 0224, 0258, 0260,
0262, 0265, 0328
Tashiko 0260, 0264, 0266,
0327, 0328
Tatung 0102, 0227, 0260,
0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
TCM 0259, 0261
Teac 0274, 0328
Tec 0260, 0261, 0273,
0328
Technics 0067, 0069, 0106
TechniSat 0320, 0417, 0418,
0419
Techwood 0069, 0072, 0090,
0106
TEDELEX 0328
Teknika 0072, 0085, 0088,
0090, 0094, 0100,
0103, 0104, 0105,
0225
Teleavia 0267
Telecor 0274, 0328
Telefunken 0267, 0268, 0272,
0274
Telegazi 0274
Telemeister 0274
Telesonic 0274
Telestar 0274
Teletech 0261, 0271, 0273,
0274
Teleton 0260, 0328
Televideon 0327
Televiso 0275
Tensai 0261, 0262, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0328
Tesmet 0268
Tevion 0259, 0261
Texet 0260, 0273, 0327,
0328
Thomson 0238, 0239, 0240,
0260, 0267, 0268,
0272, 0274, 0335
Thorn 0271, 0274
TMK 0072, 0077, 0090
TNCi 0076
Tokai 0268, 0274, 0328
Tokyo 0260, 0327
Tomashi 0270
Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0061, 0062,
0063, 0064, 0065,
0122, 0123, 0124,
0128, 0130, 0132,
0139, 0214, 0244,
0266, 0283, 0305,
0328, 0329, 0342,
0350, 0352, 0353,
0354, 0375, 0404
Totevision 0085
Towada 0265, 0328
Trakton 0328
Trans Continens
0274, 0328
Transtec 0327
Trident 0328
Triumph 0274
Uher 0243, 0249, 0265,
0268, 0274
Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263,
0274, 0327
Unic Line 0274
United 0271
Universum 0243, 0249, 0259,
0268, 0269, 0271,
0274, 0328
Univox 0274
Vector Research
0096
Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268,
0269, 0271, 0274,
0328
Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273,
0274
Victor 0093, 0266, 0268
VIDEOLOGIC
0327
Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327,
0328
VideoSystem 0268, 0274
Videotechnic 0327, 0328
Vidikron 0088
Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090,
0103
Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226,
0318
Viking 0107
Viore 0198
Visiola 0260, 0327
Vision 0268, 0274, 0328
Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160,
0227, 0420, 0421,
0422, 0423, 0424
Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274
Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264,
0265, 0268, 0274
Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328
Wards 0072, 0077, 0088,
0090, 0091, 0096,
0098, 0099, 0100,
0103, 0105
Watson 0268, 0271, 0274
Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327
Waycon 0061
Wega 0257, 0266, 0274
Wegavox 0273
Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142
White Westinghouse
0008, 0119, 0260,
0263, 0271, 0274,
0327
Wincom 0055, 0056
Xrypton 0274
Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0072, 0090, 0096,
0103
Yamishi 0274, 0328
Yokan 0274
Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260,
0261, 0262, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Yorx 0262
Zanussi 0264, 0328
Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078,
0079, 0090, 0100,
0108, 0111
VCR
ABS 1066
Adventura 1023
Adyson 1090
Aiwa 1023, 1072, 1073,
1074
Akai 1071, 1073
Akiba 1079, 1090
Akura 1073, 1079, 1090
Alba 1074, 1075, 1076,
1079, 1090, 1091
Alienware 1066
Ambassador 1076
American High
1022
Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091
Anitech 1079, 1090
Apex 1010
ASA 1077, 1078
Asha 1020
Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078,
1079, 1090
Audio Dynamics
1018
Audiosonic 1091
Audiovox 1021
Baird 1072, 1073, 1075,
1091
Bang & Olufsen
1067
Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076,
1079, 1090, 1091
Baur 1078
Beaumark 1020
Bell & Howell
1019
Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091
Black Panther Line
1075, 1091
Blaupunkt 1078
Bondstec 1076, 1090
Broksonic 1054
Bush 1074, 1075, 1079,
1090, 1091, 1097,
1099, 1109, 1139
Calix 1021
Candle 1020, 1021
Canon 1022
Cathay 1091
Catron 1076
CGE 1072, 1073
Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090
CineVision 1058
Citizen 1020, 1021
Clatronic 1076, 1090
Colortyme 1018
Condor 1075, 1076, 1091
Craig 1020, 1021
Crown 1075, 1076, 1079,
1090, 1091
Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022
Cybernex 1020
CyberPower 1066
Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076,
1091, 1116, 1141
Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091
Dantax 1074
Daytron 1075, 1091
DBX 1018
De Graaf 1078
Decca 1072, 1073, 1078
Dell 1066
Denko 1090
DiamondVision
1050
DigiFusion 1092
DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040,
1059, 1060, 1061,
1065
Dish Network 1064
Dishpro 1064
Dual 1073, 1078, 1091
Dumont 1072, 1078
Durabrand 1032
Dynatech 1023
Echostar 1064
Elbe 1091
Elcatech 1090
Electrohome 1021
Electrophonic 1021
Elsay 1090
Elta 1079, 1090, 1091
Emerson 1021, 1022, 1023,
1070, 1090
ESC 1075, 1091
Etzuko 1079, 1090
Expressvu 1064
Ferguson 1073
Fidelity 1072, 1090
Finlandia 1078
Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078
Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079,
1090
Fisher 1019
Flint 1074
Formenti/Phoenix
1078
Frontech 1076
Fuji 1022
Fujitsu 1072
Funai 1023, 1072
Galaxy 1072
Garrard 1023
Gateway 1066
GBC 1076, 1079
GE 1020, 1022
GEC 1078
Geloso 1079
General 1076
General Technic
1074
GOI 1064
GoldHand 1079, 1090
Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072,
1077
Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076,
1077, 1079, 1090,
1091
Gradiente 1023
Graetz 1073
Granada 1078
Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076,
1077, 1079, 1090,
1091
Grundig 1078, 1079
Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091
Harley Davidson
1023
Harman/Kardon
1018
Harwood 1090
HCM 1079, 1090
Headquarter 1019
Hewlett Packard
1066
Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090,
1091
Hisawa 1074
Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078,
1089, 1108, 1124
HNS 1060
Howard Computers
1066
HP 1066
HTS 1064
Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061
Hughes Network Systems
1038, 1060
Humax 1035, 1060, 1094
Hush 1066
Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090,
1091
v
iBUYPOWER 1066
Impego 1076
Imperial 1072
Inno Hit 1075, 1076, 1078,
1079, 1090, 1091
Innovation 1074
Instant Replay 1022
Interbuy 1077, 1090
Interfunk 1078
Intervision 1072, 1091
Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090
ITT 1073
ITV 1075, 1077, 1091
JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020,
1021, 1022
JCL 1022
JVC 1011, 1012, 1013,
1014, 1015, 1016,
1017, 1018, 1019,
1028, 1035, 1064,
1073, 1085, 1117,
1130, 1131, 1133,
1134, 1135, 1136
Kaisui 1079, 1090
Karcher 1078
Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076,
1090
Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073
Kodak 1021, 1022
Korpel 1079, 1090
Kyoto 1090
Lenco 1075
Leyco 1079, 1090
LG 1021, 1053, 1072,
1077, 1088, 1100,
1106, 1125, 1143
Lifetec 1074
Linksys 1066
Lloyd’s 1023
Loewe Opta 1077, 1078
Logik 1079, 1090
Lumatron 1075, 1091
Luxor 1090
LXI 1021
M Electronic 1072
Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044,
1070
Magnin 1021
Manesth 1079, 1090
Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022,
1078
Mark 1091
Marta 1021
Matsui 1074, 1077
Matsushita 1022
Media Center PC
1066
Mediator 1078
Medion 1074
MEI 1022
Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023, 1032,
1048, 1069, 1072,
1077
Memphis 1079, 1090
MGN Technology
1020
Micromaxx 1074
Microsoft 1066
Microstar 1074
Migros 1072
Mind 1066
Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078
Motorola 1022
MTC 1020
Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072,
1076, 1078, 1079,
1090
Murphy 1072
NEC 1018, 1019, 1073
Neckermann 1073, 1078
NEI 1078
Nesco 1079, 1090
Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091
Nikko 1021
Niveus Media 1066
Noblex 1020
Nokia 1073, 1091
Nordmende 1073
Northgate 1066
Oceanic 1072, 1073
Okano 1074, 1090, 1091
Olympus 1022
Optimus 1021
Orion 1033, 1069, 1074,
1097, 1139
Orson 1072
Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079,
1090
Otto Versand 1078
Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079,
1090
Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009,
1022, 1026, 1042,
1043, 1068, 1082,
1101, 1126, 1132
Pathe Marconi 1073
Perdio 1072
Philco 1022, 1090
Philips 1022, 1030, 1035,
1038, 1039, 1040,
1044, 1055, 1060,
1078, 1084, 1095,
1096, 1104, 1105,
1111, 1113, 1122,
1124, 1127, 1128,
1129
Philips Magnavox
1030
Phonola 1078
Pilot 1021
Pioneer 1078, 1118
Polaroid 1010, 1049
Portland 1075, 1076, 1091
Prinz 1072
Profex 1079
Proline 1072
Proscan 1065
Prosonic 1074, 1091
Pulsar 1032
Pye 1052, 1078
Quarter 1019
Quartz 1019
Quasar 1022
Quelle 1072, 1078
Radialva 1090
RadioShack 1021
RadioShack/Realistic
1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023
Radiola 1078
Radix 1021
Randex 1021
RCA 1020, 1022, 1025,
1035, 1040, 1047,
1060, 1065
Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023
ReplayTV 1041, 1068
Rex 1073
RFT 1076, 1078, 1090
Ricavision 1066
Roadstar 1075, 1077, 1079,
1090, 1091
Royal 1090
Runco 1032
Saba 1073
Saisho 1074, 1079
Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038,
1040, 1046, 1060,
1080, 1107, 1110,
1112, 1121, 1123,
1140, 1142
Samurai 1076, 1090
Sanky 1032
Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069,
1073
Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114
Saville 1091
SBR 1078
Schaub Lorenz
1072, 1073
Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075,
1076, 1077, 1078,
1079, 1090, 1091
Sears 1019, 1021, 1022
SEG 1079, 1090, 1091
SEI-Sinudyne 1078
Seleco 1073
Sentra 1076, 1090
Sentron 1079, 1090
Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057,
1081, 1115, 1137
Shintom 1079, 1090
Shivaki 1077
Shogun 1020
Siemens 1077
Silva 1077
Silver 1091
Singer 1022
Sinudyne 1078
Solavox 1076
Sonic Blue 1041, 1068
Sonneclair 1090
Sonoko 1075, 1091
Sontec 1077
Sony 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1024, 1027,
1036, 1062, 1066,
1083, 1098, 1103,
1138
Stack 1066
Stack 9 1066
Standard 1075, 1091
Stern 1091
STS 1022
Sunkai 1074
Sunstar 1072
Suntronic 1072
Sunwood 1079, 1090
Superscan 1070
Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044,
1052, 1070
Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090
Systemax 1066
Tagar Systems 1066
Taisho 1074
Tandberg 1091
Tandy 1019
Tashiko 1021, 1072
Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078
TCM 1074, 1093, 1120
Teac 1023, 1091
Tec 1076, 1090, 1091
Technics 1022
Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023
Teleavia 1073
Telefunken 1073
Teletech 1090, 1091
Tenosal 1079, 1090
Tensai 1072, 1077, 1079,
1090
Tevion 1074
Thomson 1073, 1087
Thorn 1073
Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037,
1039, 1040, 1060,
1061, 1062
TMK 1020
Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090
Tonsai 1079
Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034,
1051, 1063, 1066,
1073, 1078, 1086,
1099, 1102, 1119,
1144
Totevision 1020, 1021
Touch 1066
Towada 1079, 1090
Towika 1079, 1090
TVA 1076
Uher 1077
UltimateTV 1065
Ultravox 1091
Unitech 1020
United Quick Star
1075, 1091
Universum 1072, 1077, 1078
Vector Research
1018
Video Concepts
1018
Videon 1074
Videosonic 1020
Viewsonic 1066
Voodoo 1066
Wards 1020, 1021, 1022,
1023
Weltblick 1077
XR-1000 1022, 1023
Yamaha 1018, 1019
Yamishi 1079, 1090
Yokan 1079, 1090
Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079,
1090
Zenith 1032
ZT Group 1066
DVD
4Kus 2097
Accurian 2220
Advent 2169, 2201
AEG 2312
Airis 2318
Aiwa 2272
Akai 2170, 2195, 2225,
2227
Akura 2310
Alba 2018, 2232, 2247,
2259, 2264
Alco 2199
Alize 2315
Allegro 2215
Amitech 2312
Amphion MediaWorks
2145
AMW 2145, 2313
Apex 2044, 2045, 2046,
2047, 2076, 2208,
2209
Apple 2163
Arrgo 2216
Asono 2318
Aspire 2140, 2202
Astar 2162
vi
ATACOM 2318
Audiovox 2111, 2199
Avious 2317
Awa 23 13
Axion 2171
Bang & Olufsen
2210
Baze 2317
BBK 2318
Bellagio 2313
Best Buy 2309
Blaupunkt 2209
Blue Parade 2207
Boghe 2300
Brainwave 2312
Brandt 2198, 2238
Broksonic 2192, 2195
Bush 2018, 2060, 2248,
2264, 2301, 2308,
2317, 2350, 2368
California Audio Labs
2197
Cambridge Audio
2304
CAT 2306, 2307
CAVS 2146
Centrum 2307
CGV 2304, 2312
Changhong 2222
Cinetec 2313
CineVision 2191, 2215
Clatronic 2308, 2317
Coby 2077, 2124, 2314
Conia 2301
Continental Edison
2313
Crown 2312
C-Tech 2305
Curtis Mathes 2217
CVG 2299
CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216,
2233, 2258
Cytron 2166
Daenyx 2313
Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280,
2299, 2312, 2313,
2326, 2376
Daewoo International
2313
Dalton 2311
Dansai 2303, 2312
Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313
Dayton 2313
DEC 2308
Decca 2312
Denon 2105, 2147, 2197,
2286
Denver 2288, 2308, 2310,
2314
Denzel 2302
Desay 2159
Diamond 2304, 2305
DiamondVision
2179, 2186
Disney 2078, 2088
DK Digital 2257
Dmtech 2226
Dual 2302
Durabrand 2218
DVX 2305
Easy Home 2309
Eclipse 2304
E-Dem 2318
Electrohome 2312
Elin 2312
Elta 2263, 2312, 2315
Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219
Enterprise 2211
Enzer 2302
Epson 2165
ESA 2219
Finlux 2304, 2312, 2317
Fintec 2299
Fisher 2212
Funai 2219
Gateway 2097
GE 2079, 2206, 2209
Gericom 2269
GFM 2176
Giec 2300
Global Solutions
2305
Global Sphere 2305
Go Video 2135, 2215
Goodmans 2247, 2289, 2298,
2300, 2308, 2330,
2369
GPX 2177
Gradiente 2197
Graetz 2302
Greenhill 2209
Grundig 2271
Grunkel 2312, 2316
GVG 2299
H&B 2308
H_her 2318
Haaz 2304, 2305
Haier 2172
Harman/Kardon
2125, 2213
HiMAX 2309
Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108,
2302, 2309, 2320,
2366
Hiteker 2208
Home Tech Industries
2318
Hyundai 2316
Ilo 2167
Initial 2167, 2209
Innovation 2228
Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219
Integra 2207
Irradio 2103
iSymphony 2164
JBL 2213
JVC 2049, 2050, 2051,
2052, 2053, 2054,
2055, 2056, 2057,
2070, 2242, 2261,
2275, 2276, 2277,
2278, 2339, 2340,
2341, 2342, 2386,
2387, 2389, 2390,
2391
Jwin 2148
Kansai 2314
Kawasaki 2199
Kennex 2312
Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270
KeyPlug 2312
Kiiro 2312
Kingavon 2308
Kiss 2302
KLH 2199, 2209
Koda 2308
Koss 2095, 2198, 2204
KXD 2309
Landel 2221
Lasonic 2214
Lawson 2305
Lecson 2303
Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317
Lenoxx 2203, 2218
LG 2080, 2107, 2115,
2116, 2141, 2188,
2211, 2215, 2237,
2239, 2285, 2293,
2295, 2348, 2370
Life 2228
Lifetec 2228
Limit 2305
Liquid Video 2204
Liteon 2097, 2121, 2220
Loewe 2274
LogicLab 2305
Magnavox 2075, 2096, 2178,
2180, 2196, 2205,
2219, 2308
Magnex 2317
Majestic 2314
Marantz 2282
Marquant 2312
Matsui 2198, 2296
McIntosh 2149
Mecotek 2312
Medion 2228
Memorex 2078, 2184, 2195
MiCO 2300, 2304
Micromaxx 2228
Microsoft 2206
Microstar 2228
Minoka 2312
Minowa 2317
Mintek 2167, 2209
Mitsubishi 2081
Mizuda 2308, 2309
Monyka 2302
Mustek 2232
Mx Onda 2304
Mystral 2316
Naiko 2312
Nesa 2209
Neufunk 2302
Nevir 2312
Next Base 2221
Nexxtech 2161
NU-TEC 2301
Onkyo 2205, 2290
Oopla 2097
Oppo 2150, 2173
Optim 2303
Optimus 2230
Orava 2308
Orbit 2313
Orion 2027, 2060
Oritron 2198, 2204
P&B 2308
Pacific 2305
Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,
2036, 2037, 2038,
2039, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043, 2074,
2089, 2104, 2108,
2112, 2120, 2131,
2132, 2197, 2205,
2244, 2245, 2246,
2253, 2254, 2255,
2292, 2321, 2324,
2327, 2328, 2329,
2331, 2383, 2388
Parasound 2151
peeKTON 2318
Philips 2026, 2061, 2062,
2075, 2090, 2094,
2096, 2097, 2103,
2110, 2126, 2180,
2193, 2205, 2231,
2235, 2241, 2251,
2252, 2256, 2260,
2268, 2282, 2332,
2333, 2343, 2344,
2345, 2367, 2371,
2373, 2380, 2382,
2385
Phonotrend 2317
Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014,
2063, 2064, 2065,
2066, 2067, 2113,
2134, 2207, 2230,
2236, 2265, 2266,
2267, 2297, 2322,
2351, 2352, 2353,
2354, 2355, 2356,
2357, 2358, 2359,
2377
Pointer 2312
Polaroid 2047, 2133, 2185
Portland 2312
Powerpoint 2313
Prima 2174
Proceed 2208
Proscan 2206
Prosonic 2299, 2314
Protron 2152
Provision 2308
Pye 2194
Qwestar 2198
Raite 2302
RCA 2058, 2059, 2071,
2079, 2183, 2199,
2206, 2207, 2209
RedStar 2310, 2312, 2314
Regent 2203
Reoc 2305
Rimax 2315
Rio 2215
Roadstar 2281, 2308
Ronin 2313
Rotel 2153
Rowa 2200, 2301
Rownsonic 2307
Saba 2198, 2238
Sabaki 2305
Saivod 2312
Sampo 2223
Samsung 2031, 2032, 2033,
2034, 2035, 2082,
2127, 2137, 2138,
2154, 2182, 2197,
2283, 2319, 2325,
2346, 2347, 2349,
2372, 2381
Sansui 2027, 2195, 2304,
2305, 2312
Sanyo 2139, 2195, 2212,
2374
ScanMagic 2232
Schaub Lorenz
2312
Schneider 2226
Scientific Labs
2305
Scott 2243, 2311
Seeltech 2318
SEG 2240, 2302, 2305,
2313
Sharp 2009, 2010, 2084,
2122, 2142, 2143,
2144, 2181, 2190,
2228, 2262, 2375
Shinsonic 2167
Sigmatek 2309, 2318
Silva 2310
Singer 2304, 2305
Skymaster 2279, 2305
vii
Skyworth 2310
Slim Art 2312
SM Electronic 2305
Sonic Blue 2215
Sontech 2316
Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,
2020, 2021, 2022,
2023, 2024, 2025,
2069, 2072, 2073,
2085, 2086, 2087,
2091, 2092, 2093,
2102, 2128, 2129,
2130, 2249, 2250,
2323, 2334, 2335,
2336, 2360, 2361,
2362, 2363, 2364,
2365, 2384
Soundmaster 2305
Soundmax 2305
Spectra 2313
Spectroniq 2155
Standard 2305
Star Cluster 2305
Starmedia 2308, 2318
Sungale 2158
Sunkai 2312
Superscan 2196
Supervision 2305
Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189,
2196, 2219, 2224
Symphonic 2062, 2180
Synn 2305
T.D.E. Systems
2316
Tatung 2083, 2312
TCM 2228, 2379
Teac 2199, 2287, 2301,
2305
Tec 2310
Technics 2197
Technika 2312, 2317
Telefunken 2307
Tensai 2312
Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311
Theta Digital 2207
Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284,
2294
Tokai 2302, 2310
Top Suxess 2318
Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027,
2028, 2029, 2030,
2098, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2114, 2117,
2118, 2119, 2136,
2187, 2195, 2205,
2291, 2337, 2338,
2378
TRANScontinents
2313, 2317
Transonic 2317
Trio 2312
Trutech 2160
TruVision 2309
TSM 2318
Umax 2315
United 2317
Urban Concepts
2205
US Logic 2167
Venturer 2199
Viewmaster 2318
Vocopro 2156
VocoStar 2157
Waitec 2318
Welltech 2300
Westinghouse 2109, 2168
Wharfedale 2304, 2305
Woxter 2315, 2318
Xbox 2206, 2229
Xlogic 2305, 2312
XMS 2312
Xoro 2300
Yamada 2097, 2313, 2315
Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2002,
2003, 2011, 2018,
2019, 2036, 2106,
2197, 2273
Yamakawa 2302, 2313
Yukai 2232
Zenith 2080, 2141, 2205,
2211, 2215
Blu-ray Disc
LG 2115
Panasonic 2089, 2131, 2132
Pioneer 2134
Samsung 2035, 2127
Sharp 2142, 2143, 2144
Sony 2025
Yamaha 2018
DVR
Bush 2060
Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,
2040, 2041, 2042
Philips 2061, 2062
Pioneer 2063, 2064, 2065,
2066, 2067
RCA 2059
Samsung 2035
Yamaha 2036
DVD Recorder
Aspire 2140
Astar 2162
Broksonic 2192
Go Video 2135
Hitachi 2108
Insignia 2080
Irradio 2103
JVC 2054, 2055, 2056,
2057
LG 2107, 2115, 2141,
2188
Liteon 2121
Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,
2041, 2042, 2043,
2089, 2104, 2108,
2112
Philips 2090, 2096, 2097,
2126, 2193
Pioneer 2067, 2113
Pye 2194
Samsung 2034, 2082, 2138
Sansui 2027
Sanyo 2139
Sony 2022, 2023, 2024,
2085, 2086, 2087,
2102, 2128, 2129,
2130
Sylvania 2189
Toshiba 2030, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2114, 2117,
2118, 2119
Yamaha 2106
Cable
ABC 3004, 3015, 3016,
3017, 3037, 3040,
3067, 3080, 3081
ADB 3070
Adelphia 3003
Alcatel 3066
Americast 3046
Amstrad 3048, 3068
Antronix 3019, 3020
Archer 3020
Arcon 3048
AT&T 3013
Axis 3048
Bell South 3046
Cable Vision 3014
Cabletenna 3019
Cabletime 3058
Cableview 3005
Clearmaster 3045
ClearMax 3045
Clyde Cablevision
3059
Colour Voice 3022
Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039
Comcrypt 3057
Comtronics 3023
Contec 3024
Coolmax 3045
COX 3006
Cryptovision 3060
Director 3006
Eastern 3025
Everquest 3041
Fidelity 3048
Filmnet 3057
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3061
Filmnet Comcrypt
3061
Finlux 3051
Focus 3044
Foxtel 3068
France Telecom
3054, 3055
Freebox 3069
GC Electronics
3020
GE 3015, 3016
GEC 3059
Gemini 3026, 3041
General Instrument
3006, 3008, 3016,
3039, 3050, 3067,
3075
Goldstar 3042
Gooding 3049
Grundig 3048, 3049
Hamlin 3027, 3028
Hirschmann 3051
Hitachi 3016
HomeChoice 3056
Humax 3001, 3002, 3071
ITT Nokia 3051
Jasco 3041
Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016,
3026, 3037, 3041,
3050, 3064, 3067,
3075
JVC 3049
Kabel Deutschland
3043, 3073, 3074
Macab 3055
Magnavox 3029
Maspro 3049
Matsui 3049
MegaCable 3039
Memorex 3030, 3040
Minerva 3049
Mnet 3057
Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010,
3013, 3039, 3072,
3075
Movie Time 3031, 3063
Mr Zapp 3055
Multichoice 3057
Multitech 3045
NEC 3018
NET Brazil 3007
Nokia 3051
Noos 3055
NSC 3031
Oak 3024
Pace 3011, 3043, 3084
Palladium 3049
Panasonic 3034, 3036, 3040
Paragon 3040
Philips 3021, 3022, 3029,
3049, 3053, 3054,
3055
Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038,
3042, 3048, 3083,
3084
Popular Mechanics
3044
Proscan 3015, 3016
Pulsar 3040
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3064
Quasar 3040
RadioShack 3041, 3045
RCA 3005, 3036, 3076,
3077
Realistic 3020
Recoton 3044
Regal 3028
Regency 3025
Rembrandt 3016
Runco 3040
Sagem 3055
Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032,
3042
SAT 3048
Scientific Atlanta
3003, 3004, 3011,
3012, 3013, 3062,
3078, 3079, 3080,
3081, 3082, 3083,
3084
Signal 3026, 3041
Signature 3016
Sony 3014, 3047
Sprucer 3036
Standard Component
3033
Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041,
3067
Stargate 3026, 3041
Starquest 3026, 3041
Supercable 3008
Supermax 3045
Tele+1 3057, 3061
Telepiu 3057
Thomson 3000, 3009
TIME WARNER
3006
Tocom 3017
Torx 3067
Toshiba 3040
Tristar 3045
Tudi 3052
Tusa 3026, 3041
TV86 3031
Unika 3019, 3020
United Cable 3037, 3064
Universal 3019, 3020
Universum 3049, 3051
V2 3045
Videoway 3065
View Star 3024, 3029, 3031
viii
Viewmaster 3045
Vision 3045
Visiopass 3051, 3054, 3055
Vortex View 3045
Wittenberg 3048
Zenith 3035, 3040, 3046
Zentek 3044
Sattelite
AB Sat 4138, 4139
AccessHD 4058
ADB 4142
AGS 4138
Akai 4101, 4103
Alba 4083, 4084, 4085,
4086, 4108, 4139
Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088
Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103
Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090
Alltech 4139
Alpha 4103
Alpha Digital 4058
Alphastar 4031
Amitronica 4139
Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136,
4139
Anglo 4139
Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090,
4139
Anttron 4083, 4086
Apollo 4083
Armstrong 4089, 4103
Artec 4054
Asat 4101, 4103
ASLF 4139
Astacom 4138
Astra 4089, 4091, 4100,
4137, 4139
Astro 4074, 4086, 4088,
4090, 4093, 4135,
4136, 4137
AudioTon 4086, 4098
Aurora 4140
Austar 4140
Axiel 4138
Axis 4074, 4090, 4091,
4096
Best 4074, 4090
Blaupunkt 4093
Blue Sky 4139
Boca 4089, 4100, 4105,
4139
Boston 4138
Brain Wave 4095
Broadcast 4094
Broco 4139
BSkyB 4113, 4123
BT 4138
Bubu Sat 4139
Bush 4084, 4127
Cambridge 4136
Canal Satellite 4135
Canal+ 4135
CaptiveWorks 4049
Channel Master
4060, 4085
Chaparral 4025
CHEROKEE 4138
Chess 4134, 4139
CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137
Clatronic 4095
CNT 4088
Comag 4000, 4001, 4002,
4003, 4004
Commlink 4087
Comtech 4096
Condor 4074, 4090, 4137
Connexions 4074, 4092
Conrad 4074, 4133, 4136,
4137
Conrad Electronic
4137, 4139
Contec 4096
Coolsat 4050
Cosat 4098
Coship 4063
Crown 4089
Daeryung 4092
Daewoo 4107, 4139
DDC 4085
Delega 4085
Dew 4096
Diamond 4097
Digiality 4137
Digital Stream 4059
DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020,
4021, 4022, 4024,
4037, 4038, 4040,
4041, 4043, 4045,
4057, 4106, 4143,
4144, 4145, 4146,
4147, 4148, 4149,
4150, 4151, 4152,
4153, 4154, 4155,
4156, 4157
Discoverer 4134
Discovery 4138
Diseqc 4138
Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013,
4014, 4019, 4039,
4064
Dishpro 4039, 4064
Distrisat 4103
Ditristrad 4098
DNT 4092, 4101, 4103
Drake 4026
DStv 4140
Dune 4074
Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039,
4064, 4092, 4139
Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089,
4136, 4139
Elap 4138, 4139
Elekta 4088
Elsat 4139
Elta 4074, 4083, 4090,
4098, 4101, 4103
Emanon 4083
Emme Esse 4074, 4090
Engel 4139
Ep Sat 4084
EURIEULT 4077
Eurodec 4102
Europa 4103, 4136, 4137
Europhon 4137
Eurosat 4089
Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090,
4133, 4136, 4137
Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137
Eutelsat 4139
Exator 4083, 4086
Expressvu 4039
Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139
Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132
Fidelity 4136
Finlandia 4084
Finlux 4084
FinnSat 4096, 4102
Flair Mate 4139
Foxtel 4140
Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136
FTEmaximal 4074, 4139
Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090,
4092, 4093, 4101,
4133
Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090,
4091, 4096, 4098,
4133, 4140
GE 4015, 4016, 4061,
4151
General Instrument
4027, 4065
GMI 4089
GOI 4039
Goldbox 4135
GoldStar 4099
Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084
Goodmind 4061
Grandin 4077
Grothusen 4083, 4099
Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093,
4113, 4129, 4136,
4140
Hänsel & Gretel
4137
Hantor 4083, 4095
Hanuri 4088
Hauppauge 4126
Heliocom 4137
Helium 4137
Hinari 4085
Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128,
4136, 4137, 4138
Hisawa 4095
Hisense 4066
Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149,
4153
Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007
Houston 4098
HTS 4039
Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144,
4146, 4150, 4152
Hughes Network Systems
4021
Humax 4051, 4075, 4076,
4110
Huth 4087, 4089, 4094,
4095, 4096, 4098,
4137, 4141
Hypson 4077
Ilo 4066
Imex 4077
Innovation 4090
Insignia 4057
Intertronic 4089
Intervision 4098, 4137
ITT Nokia 4084
Jerrold 4065
Johansson 4095
JOK 4138
JSR 4098
JVC 4011, 4019, 4039,
4079
Kamm 4139
Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103,
4109, 4112, 4120,
4133, 4138, 4139
Kathrein Eurostar
4133
Klap 4138
Konig 4137
Kosmos 4099
KR 4086
Kreiselmeyer 4093
K-SAT 4139
Kyostar 4083
L&S Electronic
4074
Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090,
4100, 4133, 4134,
4137
Lasonic 4062
Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099,
4133, 4137, 4139
Leng 4095
Lennox 4098
Lenson 4136
Lexus 4103
LG 4053, 4057, 4099
Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134,
4139
Lifetec 4090
Lorenzen 4137
Lorraine 4099
Lupus 4074, 4090
Luxor 4136
Lyonnaise 4102
Macab 4102
Magnavox 4045, 4055
Manata 4077, 4138, 4139
Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098,
4138
Marantz 4101
Mascom 4088
Maspro 4084, 4139
Matsui 4138
Max 4137
Mediabox 4135
Mediamarkt 4089
Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136
Medion 4074, 4090, 4139
Medison 4139
Mega 4101, 4103
Memorex 4045
Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083,
4086, 4087, 4088,
4139
Metz 4093
Micro electronic
4136, 4137, 4139
Micro Technology
4139
MicroGem 4056
Micromaxx 4074, 4090
Microstar 4090
Microtec 4139
Minerva 4093
Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152
Mitsumi 4100
Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101,
4103, 4139
Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010,
4065
Multichoice 4140
Multitec 4134
Muratto 4099
Mysat 4139
Navex 4095
Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136,
4137, 4139
Neusat 4139
Next Level 4065
NextWave 4141
Nikko 4089, 4139
Nokia 4084, 4122
Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085,
4088, 4102
Nova 4140
Novis 4095
Oceanic 4097
Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096
Okano 4089
Optex 4098
Optus 4135, 4140, 4141
ix
Orbitech 4083, 4134, 4135,
4136
OSat 4086
Otto Versand 4093
Pace 4084, 4093, 4113,
4121, 4125, 4138
Pacific 4097
Packsat 4138
Palcom 4085
Palladium 4089, 4136
Palsat 4134, 4136
Panasat 4140
Panasonic 4043, 4044, 4046,
4084, 4113, 4118,
4143, 4148
Panda 4084, 4137
Pansat 4047
Patriot 4138
Paysat 4045
PCT 4060
Philco 4055
Philips 4021, 4022, 4045,
4084, 4101, 4103,
4111, 4115, 4135,
4138, 4150, 4152,
4153, 4155, 4156
Phoenix 4096
Phonotrend 4084, 4087, 4098
Pioneer 4124, 4135
Polsat 4102
Predki 4095
Premiere 4098, 4135
Priesner 4089
Primestar 4030
Profile 4138
Promax 4084
Prosat 4085, 4087
Proscan 4015, 4016, 4040,
4151
Protek 4097
Proton 4066
Provision 4088
Quadral 4074, 4085, 4087,
4090, 4138
Quelle 4093, 4133, 4137
Quiero 4102
RadioShack 4065
Radiola 4101, 4103
Radix 4092, 4119
Rainbow 4086
RCA 4015, 4016, 4034,
4035, 4036, 4037,
4038, 4040, 4151,
4157
Realistic 4028
Redpoint 4091
Redstar 4074, 4090
RFT 4087, 4101, 4103
Roadstar 4139
Roch 4077
Rover 4074, 4139
Saba 4088, 4133, 4137,
4138
Sabre 4084
Sagem 4069, 4102
Sakura 4096
Samsung 4018, 4021, 4023,
4041, 4042, 4081,
4082, 4083, 4114,
4150, 4154
SAT 4085, 4136
Sat Cruiser 4141
Sat Partner 4083, 4086, 4088,
4095, 4099, 4136
Sat Team 4139
Satcom 4094, 4137
Satec 4139
Satelco 4074
Satford 4094
Satmaster 4094
Satplus 4134
Schneider 4090, 4134, 4138
Schwaiger 4097, 4134, 4137
SCS 4133
Seemann 4089, 4091, 4092
SEG 4074, 4083, 4090,
4095
Seleco 4098
Servi Sat 4077, 4139
Siemens 4093
Silva 4099
Skantin 4139
Skardin 4091
Skinsat 4136
SKR 4139
Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087,
4134, 4139
Skymax 4101, 4103
SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137,
4139
Skyvision 4098
SM Electronic 4134, 4139
Smart 4133, 4139
Sony 4017, 4020, 4135
SR 4089, 4100
Star Choice 4065
Starland 4139
Starring 4095
Start Trak 4083
Strong 4074, 4083, 4086,
4090, 4099, 4140
STS 4033
STVI 4077
Sumida 4089
Sunny Sound 4074
Sunsat 4139
Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100
Supermax 4141
Tandberg 4102
Tandy 4086
Tantec 4084
TCM 4090
Techniland 4094
TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073,
4092, 4103, 4116,
4117, 4134, 4135,
4136
Technology 4140
Technosat 4141
Technowelt 4137
Teco 4089, 4100
Telanor 4085
Telasat 4133, 4137
Telecom 4139
Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138
Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092,
4136, 4137
Telemaster 4088
Telesat 4137
Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136
Televes 4084, 4136
Telewire 4098
Tempo 4141
Tevion 4090, 4139
Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102,
4104, 4130, 4133,
4135, 4137, 4138,
4139
Thorens 4097
Thorn 4084
Tivax 4058
Tivo 4150
Tokai 4103
Tonna 4084, 4094, 4098,
4136, 4139
Toshiba 4144, 4152, 4153
Triad 4099
Triasat 4136
Triax 4093, 4133, 4136,
4139
Turnsat 4139
Tvonics 4132
Twinner 4077, 4139
UEC 4140
Uher 4134
UltimateTV 4020
Uniden 4029, 4045
Unisat 4089, 4096, 4103
Unitor 4095
Universum 4093, 4133, 4137
US Digital 4066
Variosat 4093
Vega 4074
Ventana 4101, 4103
Viewsat 4048
Visiosat 4095, 4098, 4138,
4139
Voom 4065
Vortec 4083
Welltech 4134
WeTeKom 4134, 4136
Wevasat 4084
Wewa 4084
Winersat 4095
Wisi 4084, 4092, 4093,
4136, 4137
Woorisat 4088
Worldsat 4138
Xrypton 4074
XSat 4139
Zehnder 4074, 4088, 4090,
4131, 4133
Zenith 4052, 4057, 4145
Zodiac 4086
CD
Yamaha 5000, 5013
CD Recoder
Yamaha 5001
MD
Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004
Tape
Yamaha 5005, 5006
Tuner
Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5014, 5015,
5016, 5017, 5018
USB
Yamaha 5012, 5021
DOCK
Yamaha 5011, 5022
LD
Yamaha 2002
x
Information about software
About FLAC codec library
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
– Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
– Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
About Vorbis library
Copyright (c) 2001, Xiphophorus
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
– Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
– Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of
its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WR37660
HTR-6280
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.
■ Front panel
HTR-6280
U
MAIN
ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO
AUDIO
THROUGH
VIDEO
AUX
USB
VOLUME
HDMI
EFFECT
BD/DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
SCENE
ZONE2
ON/OFF
INFO
MEMORY
ZONE2
CONTROL
PRESET
l
h
l
h
l
h
CATEGORY
FM AM
TUNING/CH
KNQMO R
ABC D E F G H I J
SULPTV
■ Remote control
1 2 3 4
1 25 6
1 2 3 4
7 85 6
9 0
1 2 3 4
POWER
V-AUX
PHONO
USB DOCK
MULTI
XM
SIRIUS
TUNER
FM
MOVIE MUSIC
RETURN
REC
ENT
POWER
TV
INPUT
MUTE
DISPLAY
MUTE
BD
DVD
SCENE
TV
CD
RADIO
STEREO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
INFO
MEMORY
AM
CATEGORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
SLEEP
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TRANSMIT
MAIN ZONE2
10
TV VOL TV CH
TAG PRG SELECT
CODE SET
POWER
SOURCE
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
ON SCREEN OPTION
MENU
TOP
MENU
VOLUME
ENTER
a
c
p
q
d
e
g
h
i
r
s
t
u
k
l
m
b
o
n
j
f
v
Printed in Malaysia WR37670
Documenttranscriptie
00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM U HTR-6280 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Printed in Malaysia WR37660 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 10 11 12 Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 13 14 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-i En Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. Caution-ii En 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet in the main room. 19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 21 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents INTRODUCTION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Rear panel .................................................................. 5 Front panel display..................................................... 6 Remote control........................................................... 7 Quick start guide..................................................... 8 L Preparing remote control ....................................... 9 Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 38 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.......................................................... 38 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 38 Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels...... 40 Setting the Parental Lock ......................................... 41 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 42 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9 Using the remote control............................................ 9 Using iPod™.......................................................... 43 Connections ...........................................................10 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 45 Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14 Connecting other components ................................. 15 Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 17 Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 18 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 18 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18 Connecting the power cable..................................... 19 Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 19 Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component............................ 45 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 45 BASIC OPERATION Playback.................................................................23 Enjoying the sound field programs .....................26 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 30 Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) .............................................. 30 Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).................................................................. 30 Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) ...........................................32 Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)................................................... 48 Option menu items................................................... 48 Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction............................................... 50 Editing surround decoders/sound field programs ........................................................... 51 Setting sound field parameters................................. 51 Sound field parameters ............................................ 51 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ..................................................... 55 Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 56 Speaker Setup .......................................................... 56 Sound Setup ............................................................. 58 Function Setup ......................................................... 59 DSP Parameter......................................................... 61 Memory Guard......................................................... 61 Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 62 Connecting Zone2.................................................... 62 Controlling Zone2.................................................... 63 Controlling other components with the remote control................................................................ 64 Setting remote control codes.................................... 64 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 64 Advanced setup..................................................... 65 APPENDIX Troubleshooting.................................................... 67 Glossary ................................................................. 78 Sound field program information ....................... 81 Information on HDMI™...................................... 82 Specifications......................................................... 83 Index ...................................................................... 84 (at the end of this manual) List of remote control codes.................................... i Information about software................................... x XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) ...........................................34 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 34 1 En English Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 32 Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 32 Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 33 ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX Selecting sound field programs................................ 26 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decode mode)........................................ 29 Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 29 Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 29 Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 29 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 47 Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 47 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Basic procedure........................................................ 23 Using the SCENE function ...................................... 23 Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 24 Muting audio output................................................. 24 Adjusting high/low frequency sounds (tone control) ....................................................... 24 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 24 Using your headphones............................................ 25 Displaying input signal information ........................ 25 Changing information on the front panel display .... 25 Playback of the USB storage device........................ 46 Other functions ..................................................... 47 ADVANCED OPERATION Using Auto Setup..................................................... 20 When an error message is displayed during measurement........................................................ 22 When a warning message is displayed after measurement........................................................ 22 Using USB storage devices................................... 46 BASIC OPERATION Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 20 Controlling iPod™................................................... 43 PREPARATION PREPARATION SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)........................................... 38 INTRODUCTION Features.................................................................... 2 About this manual................................................... 3 Supplied accessories................................................ 3 Part names and functions....................................... 4 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 34 XM Satellite Radio® operations ............................. 35 Registering XM Satellite Radio channels................ 36 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 37 INTRODUCTION Features ■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier • Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω) • FRONT L/R: 120 W + 120 W • CENTER: 120 W • SURROUND L/R: 120 W + 120 W • SURROUND BACK L/R: 120 W + 120 W ■ Speaker/Preout outputs • Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals (2-channel for presence or Zone2), preout jacks (7.1channel) ■ Input/Output terminals Input terminals • HDMI input x 4 • Audio/Visual input [Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input (optical) x 2, analog input x 2 [Video] Component video x 2, Video x 4 • Audio input (analog) x 2 • Phono input (analog) x 1 • Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel) • V-AUX input [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Video x 1 • DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) • USB port to connect a USB storage device Output terminals • Monitor output [Audio/Video] HDMI x 1 [Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1 • Audio/Visual output [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Video x 1 • Audio output Analog x 1 • Zone2 output Analog x 1 Other terminals Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1 Trigger output x 1 ■ • • • • Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields CINEMA DSP 3D Compressed Music Enhancer mode Virtual CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA ■ Digital audio decoders • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder 2 En • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder • DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder • DSD decoder • DTS NEO:6 decoder • Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. model only) ■ Radio tuners • FM/AM tuning capability • HD Radio digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A. model only) • XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only) • SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only) ■ HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) • HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio. – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability • Analog to analog and HDMI digital video upconversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI) capability for monitor out • Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p) → 720p, 1080i or 1080p • HDMI control function supported ■ Automatic speaker setup features • “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker outputs suitable for listening environments. ■ Other features • 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter • GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit to suit individual audiovisual system • iPod and USB file browsing and album art display capability • Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources • Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability • SCENE function for changing input sources and sound field programs with one key • Bi-amplification connection capability • Sleep timer • Multi-zone function • iTunes Tagging function (U.S.A. model only) About this manual PREPARATION Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. iPod™ “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Bluetooth™ HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Supplied accessories APPENDIX Check that you received all of the following parts. • Remote control (page 7) • Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 9) • Optimizer microphone (page 20) • AM loop antenna (page 18) • Indoor FM antenna (page 18) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. ADVANCED OPERATION Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. BASIC OPERATION Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTSHD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. INTRODUCTION • Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image. • “KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4).for the information about each position of the parts. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. • y indicates a tip for your operation. English 3 En Part names and functions Front panel A BC D E F G H I J HDMI THROUGH VOLUME ZONE2 CONTROL ZONE2 ON/OFF INFO l MEMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY l h TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE PHONES TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC USB ON/OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA K A L M N O ZONE2 ON/OFF P Q M Switches the zone function on and off (page 63). B C D E STRAIGHT H TUNING/CH l / h I Front panel display Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. Displays information on this unit (page 6). J VOLUME control K MAIN ZONE ON/OFF L PHONES jack Controls the volume of this unit (page 23). Turns this unit on and off (page 19). For plugging headphones (page 25). 4 En V Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight decode mode (page 29). P SCENE Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (page 23). Q PURE DIRECT Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 24). This key lights up when Pure Direct mode is on. R INPUT selector S OPTIMIZER MIC jack Selects an input source (page 23). For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting output characteristics of speakers (page 20). T VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game console (page 18). FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h) Change the tuner bands between FM and AM. Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS. U Changes sound field programs (page 26). PRESET l / h Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 31) or an XM/SIRIUS preset channel (pages 36 and 40). G O MEMORY Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 31) or XM/ SIRIUS channels as preset channels (pages 36 and 40). F PROGRAM selector INFO Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc) displayed on the front panel display (page 25). T TONE CONTROL N ZONE2 CONTROL Enables operation of a receiver set in Zone2, including input source switching, volume control and tuner operation, with the main amplifier or remote control after this key is pressed (page 63). S AUDIO Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers (page 24). HDMI THROUGH Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby. • when the HDMI control function is on • when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working R VIDEO U AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game console (page 18). V USB port For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio player (page 18) Part names and functions Rear panel b SIRIUS DOCK c d e f XM HDMI OUT g HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 4 HDMI 3 h i INTRODUCTION a ANTENNA (BD/DVD) HD Radio GND FM AM UNBAL. EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE PHONO SPEAKERS MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING REMOTE PR IN GND PREPARATION PR OUT PB VIDEO PB VIDEO Y Y 12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT FRONT CENTER OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 SINGLE a k FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT l m SIRIUS jack AUDIO OUT n o k For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) (page 38). b DOCK terminal l PHONO jacks m n TRIGGER OUT jack AV OUT jacks AUDIO 1/2 jacks MULTI CH INPUT jacks AUDIO OUT jacks ZONE2 OUT jacks Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different zone (page 62). p PRE OUT jacks Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an external amplifier (page 17). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION o REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting an external component that supports the remote control function (page 17). p Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (page 15). MONITOR OUT jacks Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as a TV (page 14). 1 SUBWOOFER 2 For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output (page 16). For connecting a turntable (page 15). e SUR. BACK PRE OUT For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2 (page 15). For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) (page 34). d SURROUND ADVANCED OPERATION XM jack FRONT Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (page 15). For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 17). c ZONE2 OUT CENTER BASIC OPERATION j AV OUT SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal to operate it linked with operation of this unit. For example, when an electric screen that supports a trigger input is connected, it opens and closes linked with operation of an input source selected in this unit. APPENDIX f HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 jacks For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (pages 14 and 15). g ANTENNA terminals h SPEAKERS terminals For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 18). For connecting front, center, surround and surround back speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or the speakers for Zone2 (page 62) to EXTRA SP terminals. Power cable j AV 1-6 jacks English i Connect this cable to an AC wall outlet (page 19). For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6 (page 15). 5 En Part names and functions Front panel display ab c SIRIUS XM d e f g h i HD TAG j k SLEEP ZONE 2 STEREO 3 TUNED l VOL. MUTE SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR m a b n HDMI indicator i ZONE2 indicator Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is selected as an input source. j SLEEP indicator k MUTE indicator Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input source. l VOLUME indicator d HD indicator m Cursor indicators Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 47). SIRIUS indicator Flashes when audio is muted. Displays volume levels. Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception band (page 32). e TAG indicator Lights up when the selected HR Radio program (or song being played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature (page 32). f CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP is selected. g CINEMA DSP 3D indicator h Tuner indicator Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated. Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/ AM station (page 30). o Lights up when Zone2 is turned on. XM indicator Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source. c m Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. n Multi information display o Speaker indicators Displays menu items and settings for the current operation. Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently output. Subwoofer Presence L Front L Surround L Surround back L SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR Center Presence R Front R Surround R Surround back R Surround back 6 En Part names and functions Remote control n a ZONE2 b POWER SOURCE c FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h) CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER SLEEP o p MEMORY PRESET k / n TUN./CH k / n HDMI 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 V-AUX PHONO USB DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI g Sound selection keys PRESET TUN./CH h SCENE q f AUDIO f Selects sound field programs (page 26). INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (page 23). ENHANCER SUR. DECODE g INFO Changes the information shown on the front panel display (page 25). CATEGORY FM AM e Switches a band between FM and AM. Select a channel category for XM/ SIRIUS. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT i ON SCREEN j Cursors k / n / l / h Select menu items or change PREPARATION 1 AV d Tuner keys INTRODUCTION MAIN e Displays the GUI screen (page 24). SCENE BD DVD TV CD ON SCREEN i j r OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN k MENU MUTE PRG SELECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 u v INPUT m l Numeric keys m TV control keys n TRANSMIT o CODE SET Enter numbers. Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 64). Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. ENT TV POWER TV VOL External component operation keys p POWER q SLEEP r OPTION s VOLUME +/– t DISPLAY Switches this unit on and standby (page 19). Switches the sleep timer operations (page 47). a Remote control signal transmitter Transmits infrared signals. b MAIN/ZONE2 Switches amplifiers (Main or Zone2) to be operated by the remote control (page 63). SOURCE POWER d Input selection keys Adjust the volume of this unit (page 23). Displays the play information on the video monitor. When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 43). Switches an external component on and off. HDMI 1-4 AV 1-6 AUDIO 1/2 V-AUX PHONO USB DOCK u MUTE v HD Radio keys Turns the mute function on and off (page 24). TAG PRG SELECT Stores “tag” data to the iPod or internal memory of this unit (page 32). Selects an HD Radio audio program (page 32). English TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4. Selects AV inputs 1 through 6. Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2. Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks. Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks. Selects a USB device connected to the USB port. Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal. Selects the FM/AM tuner. Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source. Selects an XM tuner as an input source. Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. APPENDIX c Displays the Option menu (page 48). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Sets remote control codes for external component operations (page 64). TV CH MUTE ADVANCED OPERATION TAG settings. Confirms a selected item. Returns to the previous screen or ends the menu display. Operate recording, playback etc. of external components (page 64). t REC l ENTER RETURN s DISPLAY TOP MENU k RADIO BASIC OPERATION h 7 En Quick start guide When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on operations and settings. Step 1: Prepare items for setup Step 2: Set up your speakers Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items necessary for setup. For example, prepare the following items for setting up a 7.1-channel sound system. Front right speaker Video monitor • Placing speakers • Connecting speakers ☞P. 10 ☞P. 11 y Subwoofer Front left speaker Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Surround right speaker • This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions, and room acoustics, etc.). You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using the YPAO technology (☞P. 20). Step 3: Connect your components Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components. Center speaker Surround Back right speaker Components (such as DVD player) Surround Back left speaker Surround left speaker Requirements Speakers qty. Front speaker 2 Center speaker 1 Surround speaker 2 Surround back speaker 2 ☞P. 14 ☞P. 15 ☞P. 16 ☞P. 17 ☞P. 18 ☞P. 17 ☞P. 18 ☞P. 34 ☞P. 38 Step 4: Turn on the power Connect the power cable and turn on this unit. Active subwoofer 1 Speaker cable 7 Subwoofer cable 1 Reproduction component such as DVD player 1 Video monitor such as TV 1 Video cable or HDMI cable 2 Audio cable 2 y • Prepare two magnetically shielded speakers (for front). The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1 Two surround speakers 2 One center speaker 3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s) • If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers. • Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables. 8 En • Connecting a TV monitor or projector • Connecting other components • Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder • Connecting an external amplifier • Connecting a USB storage device • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver • Connecting the FM and AM antennas • Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock • Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner • Connecting the power cable • Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 19 ☞P. 19 Step 5: Select the input source and start playback Select the component connected in step 3 as an input source and start playback. • Basic procedure • Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 23 ☞P. 26 y • This unit supports the SCENE function (page 23) that changes the input source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key. PREPARATION Preparing remote control 1 Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 3 Remote control sensor window PREPARATION 2 within 6 m (20 ft) 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places y • You can operate external components with this remote control by setting the remote control code (page 64). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX • Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control narrows – the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to leak. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be different even though they look the same. • If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries and set the remote control code. 30 ADVANCED OPERATION Take off the battery compartment cover. 30 BASIC OPERATION 1 3 INTRODUCTION Installing batteries in the remote control English 9 En Connections Placing speakers This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommended the following speaker layout in order to obtain the optimum surround effect. 7.1-channel speaker layout Speaker channels C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more 6.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB 5.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 10 En 80˚ ■ Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. ■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the 5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. ■ 30˚ SL ■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. SR Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each other, ideally at the same distance as that between the front left and right speakers. In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are mixed down and output from the single surround back speaker. In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are output from the surround left and right speakers. ■ Subwoofer (SW) The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and lowfrequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections from a wall. Connections 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) C INTRODUCTION ■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (page 26). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 57). Connecting speakers PREPARATION Connect your speakers to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout. y • Connect optional presence speakers or Zone2 speakers (page 62) to the EXTRA SP terminals. • You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. b a e d k j ■ 6.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers) Speakers ANTENNA HD Radio GND FM AM BASIC OPERATION HDMI 4 HDMI 3 Jacks on this unit a Front speaker L FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) f Surround back speaker SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) UNBAL. EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE SPEAKERS SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING E FRONT CENTER SINGLE CENTER SUR.BACK AUDIO OUT FRONT ZONE2 OUT SURROUND CENTER SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT ■ c ■ g f h i 7.1-channel (with presence speakers) Speakers Jacks on this unit 5.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers) Speakers Jacks on this unit a Front speaker L FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) FRONT (R) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) c Center speaker CENTER h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) f Surround back speaker L SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (L) k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) g Surround back speaker R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (R) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Presence speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Presence speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) English FRONT (L) APPENDIX a Front speaker L b Front speaker R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION H INPUT SUBWOOFER SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND ADVANCED OPERATION 2V MAX. T 11 En Connections Caution • A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker. • Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned on. • If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor. If it does not work, use magnetically shielded speakers. • Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before connecting the speakers (page 65). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN”. ■ Connecting speaker cables 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist bare wires of the cable together so that they will not cause a short circuits. ■ Using bi-amplification connections You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system which supports bi-amplification connection as shown below. To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in the advanced setup menu (page 65). Front speakers Right Left 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare wires into the hole and then tighten the knob. This unit FRONT 2 Red: positive (+) 1 Black: negative (–) 3 Connecting the banana plug Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug 12 En SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP Caution Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. Note • You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made. Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs ■ ■ Audio jacks Jack and cables Analog audio jacks (white) To transmit conventional analog stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin cables. Connect red plugs to red jacks (R) and white plugs to white jacks (L). (red) To transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. (orange) HDMI jacks HDMI Description To transmit digital video and digital audio signals. Use HDMI cables. HDMI y R COAXIAL jacks Jack and cables • We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (page 49). PREPARATION L Description Video/audio jacks INTRODUCTION This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are connecting. C OPTICAL jacks O To transmit optical digital audio signals. Use optical fiber cables for optical digital audio signals. This unit automatically converts input video signals and outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jack and MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks (video conversion). Input OPTICAL Output HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO ADVANCED OPERATION COMPONENT VIDEO ■ Video jacks Jack and cables VIDEO jacks VIDEO V Description To transmit conventional composite video signals. Use video pin cables. PR PB PR Y VIDEO PB Y VIDEO Through Converted COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (yellow) COMPONENT VIDEO jacks BASIC OPERATION COAXIAL To transmit component video signals that include luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and chrominance red (PR) components. Use component video cables. (red) PB PB (blue) Y APPENDIX Y (green) English 13 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection. Note • Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Outputting TV sounds from this unit TV, or projector c a To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio output jack of the TV. If the TV supports an optical digital output, we recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1 jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE function (page 23). b Y HDMI PB PR V TV HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDM (BD/DVD) Digital output (optical) PHONO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE PR IN GND OUT VIDEO PB Y 12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT PR PR GND PB PB VIDEO Y L OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 SURROUND Y SUR.BA MULTI CH INPU O ■ To connect an HDMI video monitor OPTICAL Jacks on components a HDMI input Jacks on this unit HDMI OUT y • This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 47). If your TV supports the HDMI control function, you can control this unit with the remote control of your TV. ■ To connect component video monitor Jacks on components b Component video output ■ Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) To connect composite video monitor Jacks on components c Video input (composite) 14 En Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO1 AUD Connections Connecting other components Note • Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Audio input (PHONO) DOCK XM HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 4 HDMI 3 (BD/DVD) HDMI input (HDMI 1-4) PHONO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE PR PR IN GND PREPARATION SIRIUS Audio / video output (AV OUT) INTRODUCTION This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control. OUT PB VIDEO PB VIDEO Y 12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT Audio / video input (AV 1-6) FRONT CENTER Audio output (AUDIO OUT) OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 Audio input (AUDIO 1/2) SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ZO O Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ SURROUND MULTI CH INPUT Audio and video player / Set-top box Output jacks on the connected external component External component External component with component video output Audio HDMI output Optical digital output Component video Audio Coaxial digital output Video Component video output Audio Coaxial digital output Video Composite output Audio Optical digital output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output Input jack HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 4 AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL AV 2 COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 4 OPTICAL VIDEO VIDEO AV 5 Analog audio VIDEO AV 6 Analog audio VIDEO English Video Input source APPENDIX External component with composite video output Audio/Video Output jack Input sources/jacks of this unit ADDITIONAL INFORMATION External component with HDMI output Signal BASIC OPERATION Y 15 En Connections y • Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If your Yamaha component has the remote in/out terminal, you can switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (page 23). • You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 61). • See page 62 on how to use the ZONE2 OUT jacks. • When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 50). ■ Audio player Output jacks on the connected external component External component Output jack External component with optical digital output Optical digital output External component with coaxial digital output Coaxial digital output External component with analog audio output Analog audio output Turntable Analog audio output Input sources/jacks of this unit Input source Input jack AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL AV 4 OPTICAL AV 2 COAXIAL AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 5 Analog audio AV 6 Analog audio AUDIO 1 Analog audio AUDIO 2 Analog audio PHONO Analog audio y • We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack. • When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier. • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. About audio/video output terminals Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jacks and AUDIO OUT jacks. An HDMI input signal, COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output. When using the AV OUT jacks: connect an external component to the VIDEO or analog audio terminal. When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal. ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multiformat player, external decoder, etc. Notes • When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor is automatically disabled. • Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1channel speaker system when using this feature. • You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio reproduction (page 50). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making a video connection (component video or composite). CENTER FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT L R L R R L Center out Subwoofer out Surround back out Surround out Front out Multi-format player or external decoder (7.1-channel output) 16 En Connections Note • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the speaker terminals. a b c d SINGLE SURROUND 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SUR. BACK PRE OUT e FRONT PRE OUT jacks b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks c SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. Surround channel output jacks. Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack. Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK terminal. Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/ receiver and this unit. SIRIUS DOCK XM BASIC OPERATION a • If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function (page 23). • If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup menu (page 65). HDMI OUT y • To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set “Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 57). d PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO PR CENTER PRE OUT jack GND Center channel output jack. PB ADVANCED OPERATION VIDEO e PREPARATION FRONT CENTER y INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting an external amplifier If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding speaker terminals. SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack Y Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Transmitting/receiving remote control signals When the components have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. HDMI 4 BD/DVD) MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE PR IN OUT PB VIDEO APPENDIX Y Remote control out Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component Remote control in IR flasher or Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) English 17 En Connections Connecting a USB storage device Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For information about USB storage devices supported by this unit, see page 46. Connecting the FM and AM antennas An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to the respective jacks. Indoor FM antenna VOLUME l EMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY l h TUNING/CH h Outdoor AM antenna Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire, and extend it outdoors (use the AM loop antenna together with this antenna). AM loop antenna SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT PURE DIRECT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC USB 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 ANTENNA HD Radio FM GND AM EFFECT VIDEO AUDIO UNBAL. EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE SPEAKERS SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING REMOTE IN USB Ground (GND terminal) The GND terminal is not for earth grounding. To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip, and place it in the moist ground. y USB memory device or USB portable audio player Using the VIDEO AUX jacks • The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good reception. • Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit. • If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. • Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is connected. Assembling the AM loop antenna Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. VOLUME l EMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY l h TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO USB Connecting the AM loop antenna The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other to the GND terminal. L AUDIO R Press and hold L R Analog audio output Video output V Game console or video camera 18 En Insert Release Connections Connecting the power cable INTRODUCTION After all connections are complete, plug the power cable of this unit into an AC wall outlet. To the AC wall outlet NE2/PRESENCE CLASS 2 WIRING PREPARATION Power cable BASIC OPERATION Turning this unit on and off Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or pPOWER on the remote control) to turn on this unit. 2 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or pPOWER) again to turn off this unit (standby mode). ADVANCED OPERATION 1 y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back. • You can also turn on this unit by pressing PSCENE (or hSCENE). • This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall outlet. Caution Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit to be saved incorrectly. APPENDIX English 19 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit. Caution • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not allow small children to enter the room during the procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. 2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the SOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. INPUT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC VIDEO USB AUDIO y • You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56). Optimizer microphone Using Auto Setup 1 Check the following points. Before starting the automatic setup, check the following. • All speakers and subwoofer are connected properly. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The video monitor is connected properly. • This unit and the video monitor are turned on. • This unit is selected as the video input source of the video monitor. • The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). • The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer are set to the maximum. “MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel display. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. Auto Setup Extra Speaker Assignment Zone2 Presence None EQ Type Flat Front Natural Start Move focus Start y • You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 56). 3 CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer y • It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod. 20 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) 4 Set Finish Select items Speaker Config Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround Back/Subwoofer Distance (Min / Max) Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Level (Min / Max) Displays the speaker output levels in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an error message is displayed during measurement” (page 22). • If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 22). 7 Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then press jENTER to start the setup procedure. A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10 seconds. A loud test tone is output during measurement. Auto Setup Auto Setup Completed ! Please disconnect the micorphone (Then this screen will automatically disappear) Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise results, stay where you will not disturb the measurement, such as to the side of or behind the speakers or outside the room. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be subjected to high temperatures such on an AV component. APPENDIX Return Notes • During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure. Press jENTER to confirm the settings. The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to measurement results. To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to select “Cancel” and press jENTER. When the following screen appears, remove the optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now complete. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics as the front left and right speakers. Select this if your front left and right speakers have significantly better qualities than the other speakers. 6 Cancel ADVANCED OPERATION Flat This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics. Select this if your speakers have similar qualities. Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1 Distance (Min / Max) : 8.0ft / 8.5ft Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB BASIC OPERATION Natural This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound. Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”. Result PREPARATION To select sound characteristics for adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ Type” and then press jCursor l / h. If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, press iON SCREEN once and then operate this unit. This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on automatically measured speaker characteristics. In “EQ Type”, you can select the following parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the desired sound characteristics. Auto Setup INTRODUCTION 5 When measurement is successfully completed, “YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display and the measurement result appears on the GUI screen. When the speakers are connected to EXTRA SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and then press jCursor l / h to select how to use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”, “Presence” or “None”. If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, press iON SCREEN once and then operate this unit. y 21 En English • If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”. • Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of speakers. • If you press jENTER before removing the optimizer microphone, “Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56) is displayed. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) When an error message is displayed during measurement If an error is detected during measurement, the measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details on each error message, see page 76. Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press jENTER. Error E-1 : No Front Speakers FrontL/R channel signals are not detected. Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers. Retry Exit Move focus Retry Performs “Auto Setup” again. Exit Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”. y • When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again. When a warning message is displayed after measurement If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the warning and solve the problem. For details on each warning message, see page 77. Auto Setup Result Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1 Distance (Min / Max) : 8.0ft / 8.5ft Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB Check 2 warnings Set Cancel See details Select items y • Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto Setup” again. 1 Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx warning(s)” and then press jENTER. Details of the warning message are displayed. If there are multiple warning messages, you can display the next message using jCursor h. 2 To return to the top result display, press jENTER again. 22 En BASIC OPERATION Playback 1 2 VOL. y • You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 24). • You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display or GUI screen as necessary (page 61). Volume-18.5dB L SL SW C R SR Note When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is output, do the following. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS” (page 49). Using the SCENE function Keys Input source Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight TV AV 1 Straight CD AV 3 Straight RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer APPENDIX y • When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing PSCENE (or hSCENE). • If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start playback on the player by using the SCENE function. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four scenes are available for different usages, such as playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. ADVANCED OPERATION Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. Refer to the operating instructions of the external component for details on playback. For selecting radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth component or USB storage device using this unit, see the following. • FM/AM radio tuning (page 30) • iPod playback (page 43) • Bluetooth component playback (page 45) • USB storage device playback (page 46) VOL. BASIC OPERATION AV1 Volume PREPARATION Input source name 3 Turn the JVOLUME control (or press sVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume. Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select an input source. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. INTRODUCTION 4 Basic procedure Selecting a SCENE Press PSCENE (or hSCENE). English y • You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 24). 23 En Playback Registering input source/sound field program y • If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you can select the desired input source and sound field program at once. 3 Select the desired input source/sound field program and then press and hold PSCENE (or hSCENE) key to edit until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. y Muting audio output 1 Press uMUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. The MUTE indicator on the front panel display flashes while audio output is muted. 2 Press uMUTE again to resume audio output. • If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of an external component to the input source (page 64). Switching remotely controlled external components linked to scene selections You can operate an external component with the remote control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the external component for each input source. Setting remote control codes for desired input sources allows you to switch between external components linked to scene selections. 1 Adjusting high/low frequency sounds (tone control) Register the remote control code of an external component to the desired input source (page 64). You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range (Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. Note 1 • This feature is not available for TUNER, SIRIUS and XM input sources. 2 While holding down the desired hSCENE key, press and hold the dInput selection key to which you registered a remote control code in step 1. From now on the external component can be remotely controllable just by selecting a scene. Selecting a source on the GUI screen 1 Press jENTER. Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. TV CD Treble 2 0.0dB Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to adjust the frequency range. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB The display returns to the previous screen automatically in few seconds. Notes • The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source. • If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. Select Scene BD/DVD Press MTONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. RADIO Enjoying pure hi-fi sound 2 Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to select the desired source. Category Source Select Scene BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO Select Media USB, DOCK, SIRIUS, XM, TUNER, PHONO, V-AUX, MULTI CH Select Input HDMI1-4, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2 24 En Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press QPURE DIRECT (or gPURE DIRECT) to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off. QPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct mode on. Playback y • The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure Direct mode. Using your headphones Changing information on the front panel display Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly. Available information differs depending on the selected input source. For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel display. INTRODUCTION The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct mode. – sound field program, tone control – display and operation of the Option menu and Setup menu – multi-zone function Input source Straight Sound field program Notes Displaying input signal information When HDMI 1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source, you can display audio/video signal information. • Input signal information is displayed on both the GUI screen and front panel display. 1 HDMI1-4 AV1-6 AUDIO1/2 V-AUX PHONO iPod (DOCK) (simple remote mode) BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Input DSP Program Audio Decoder USB iPod (DOCK) (menu browse mode) (on play information display) DSP Program, Audio Decoder, Song, Artist, Album (on GUI screen) List TUNER Press jCursor k / n to select “Signal Info” and then press jENTER. Information on the input signal is displayed. See page 49 for details about each information. Signal Info <Audio> Dolby TrueHD Format 3 / 2 / 0.1 Channel 96kHz Sampling Frequency --Bitrate <Video> Video In Video Out DSP (for HD Radio information) Call Sign*, Category*, Artist / Song*, Album*, Tag Info, DSP Program, Audio Decoder, Frequency SIRIUS Channel, Category, Artist / Song, Composer, Antenna, DSP Program, Audio Decoder XM Channel, Category, Artist / Song, Antenna, DSP Program, Audio Decoder MULTI CH Input HDMI 480p HDMI 1080p HDMI 1 Straight Note • If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 3 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. APPENDIX Input Frequency, DSP Program, Audio Decoder ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 Select the desired input source and then press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for the selected input source is displayed (page 48). Information ADVANCED OPERATION y Input source BASIC OPERATION • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones. PREPARATION Plug your headphones in the LPHONES jack on the front panel. When you select a sound field program while using the headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT CINEMA mode. Note • Information marked with “*” is not available when analog HD Radio station is selected. English 25 En Enjoying the sound field programs This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders. Selecting sound field programs ■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program. ■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs. Sound field programs for movies/TV programs ...............................Press gMOVIE repeatedly. Sound field programs for music........................................................Press gMUSIC repeatedly. Stereo reproduction ...........................................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Multi-channel stereo reproduction ....................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Compressed music enhancer.............................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Surround decoder ..............................................................................Press gSUR.DECODE repeatedly. For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display. Sound field program category Sci-Fi Program name Notes • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 29) is automatically selected. Sound field program descriptions This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. y • You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6). • Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 51. • in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP. For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE) Program Descriptions Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effectsfeaturing movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. 26 En Enjoying the sound field programs Program Descriptions Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. BASIC OPERATION For audio music sources (MUSIC) Program Descriptions Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. APPENDIX For stereo reproduction (STEREO) 2ch Stereo ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. ADVANCED OPERATION Hall in Munich Program PREPARATION This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. INTRODUCTION Drama Descriptions Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. y • When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. English 27 En Enjoying the sound field programs For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO) Program 7ch Stereo Descriptions Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER) Program Descriptions Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE) Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels. Decoder Descriptions Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources. PLIIx Movie / PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Music / PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Game / PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music. Neural Sur. (U.S.A. model only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM (sampling rate of 96 kHz or lower), Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround (except for DTS 96/24), DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. y • An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 29) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. 28 En Enjoying the sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decode mode) 1 To cancel straight decode mode, press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) again. A sound field program name appears on the front panel display, and sound is reproduced with that sound field effect. CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP terminals, perform the following settings and then select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program. • Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack. • Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 57). • Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 51). When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights up. ADVANCED OPERATION Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to “None” (page 57), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode BASIC OPERATION Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Note • SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions. – 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected. – Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected. PREPARATION 2 To enable straight decode mode, press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT). “Straight” appears on the front panel display. SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically selected when you connect the headphone plug to the PHONES jack. INTRODUCTION In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced without a sound field effect. Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 57). – headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack. – 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected. – Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used. APPENDIX English 29 En FM/AM tuning The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. ■ Frequency tuning mode You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. ■ Preset tuning mode You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. y • You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the Option menu (page 49). • (U.S.A. model only) When tuning in to an HD Radio station, the HD indicator lights up. See page 32 for details about the HD Radio features. 4 Note Notes • Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception. • When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning mode using HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) prior to the operation. • “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the entered frequency is correct. Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) 1 2 3 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press GFM (eFM) or GAM (eAM) to select a band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display according to the band that you have selected. Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) to specify the frequency. To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n). The TUNED indicator on the front panel display lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being broadcasted is in stereo. STEREO TUNED FM92.5MHz The frequency changes in the following manner according to how you press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./ CH k / n). When you press the key more than 1 second The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is detectable around the current frequency. This is effective when the tuner can receive strong signals without any interference. Once the search starts, release the key. When you keep holding the key, the search continues even when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to tune in to a specific station. When you press and release the key The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong signals and stations are skipped during the search. 30 En To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of the station. Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889”. Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning) You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset). Registering stations by automatic station preset The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM stations, use manual station preset. (U.S.A. model only) You can register up to 40 FM HD Radio, AM HD Radio and analog FM radio stations with strong signals. Note • (U.S.A. model only) If you register an FM HD Radio station with this feature, only the main audio program of the station (HD1) will be stored. To store other audio program, preset the station manually. 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed (page 48). 3 Select “Auto Preset” and then press jENTER. Auto Preset Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later from the lowest frequency upwards. FM/AM tuning y • You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY” is displayed on the front panel display. • To cancel registration, press jRETURN. 4 • To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit without any operations for about 30 seconds. 01:FM87.5MHz Frequency You can manually register FM stations with weak signals or AM stations. 1 Tune in to the desired station (page 30). Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). “Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, followed soon by the preset number to which the station will be registered. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed (page 48). 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset” and then press jENTER. • By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select the preset number to which the station will be registered. When you select a preset number to which no station is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a preset number to which any station has been already registered, the frequency of the station is displayed. Preset number y • To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press jRETURN. 4 Press jCursor k / n to select a preset number to reset and then press jENTER. The preset station registered to the selected preset number is cleared. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4. 5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. 01:Empty Flashes Preset number APPENDIX Frequency to be registered 01:FM92.5MHz ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 ADVANCED OPERATION • (U.S.A. model only) To register a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to HD8), press vPRG SELECT to select the desired audio program. y 3 y • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped. • “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are registered. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.” appears if you enter an invalid number. • When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation. • (U.S.A. model only) This unit may take a little time to call a sub-audio program of an HD Radio station. Clearing preset stations y 2 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select a preset number. BASIC OPERATION Registering stations by manual station preset You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. PREPARATION During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY” appears in the front panel display each time a station is registered. When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears and then the display returns to the Option menu. To return the display to the original state, press rOPTION. Calling a preset station (Preset tuning) INTRODUCTION y Status Preset number Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). When registration is complete, the display returns to the original state. English y • You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric keys. 31 En Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”. This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, program types, and comments) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). Notes • The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you only tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 49). • This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by using the lNumeric keys (page 30). Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs The HD indicator lights up in the front panel display when this unit is tuned into an HD Radio reception band. In this state, you can select the desired audio program if the selected FM HD Radio station provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). ■ ■ Behavior of the display This unit automatically shows the HD Radio information (call sign, etc) on the front panel display after 3 seconds. You can switch HD Radio information to be displayed (page 33). HD WXYZ-FM When multiple audio programs are provided Audio program number (relative/total) Lights up Audio program number (absolute) Using the iTunes Tagging feature HD FM 88.9MHz1 Press vPRG SELECT b / a on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired audio program. This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes Tagging feature, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”. 1 y • You can also select audio program using lNumeric keys(1-8) and lENT when this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode. In case you select an audio program currently not available, “HDx Off” (“x” indicates the program number) appears. Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD Radio audio program (if available). If the selected HD Radio program (or song being played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG indicator lights up in the front panel display and “TAG” appears on the GUI screen. Notes Lights up • When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds. • Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the broadcasting station and the time period. ■ When only one audio program is provided If this unit is tuned into an FM HD Radio station including only one audio program or an AM HD Radio station, you cannot select audio programs. Lights up HD TAG TUNED WXYZ-FM 2 While a song you want to tag is being played back, press vTAG on the remote control. If a song is tagged, “StorageSuccess” and the number of stored iTunes Tagging information files (up to 50) appear in the front panel display. HD FM 87.5MHz 32 En Notes • “Insufficient Data’ appears in the front panel display and GUI screen if tagging is not available. • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 71) Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) y Audio Decoder INTRODUCTION • This unit transmits the “tag” data to the iPod if an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the “tag” data (up to 50) in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your iPod is stationed. Current audio decoder (page 28), frequency, audio program number (absolute) Displaying HD Radio™ information Frequency Note Frequency, audio program number (absolute), audio program number (relative/total) • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or GUI screen, see “HD Radio Reception” (page 70). ■ Front panel display Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following HD Radio information display modes. Back to “Call Sign” Display example (Call Sign) Call Sign HD ■ Program category, frequency, audio program number (absolute) GUI screen Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the GUI screen. Artist name, song title, frequency, audio program number (absolute) a Preset no. b HD 1/3 FM 88.9MHz-1 Input f g Classic Rock Frankie Zipper Road to India Made-to-order Tuner Straight Enhancer Option Menu Data Hold a Preset number, call sign, audio program number (relative/total) HD Radio icon, TUNED icon c Program category, artist name, song title, album title The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored in the internal memory, frequency, audio program number (absolute) d STEREO icon e TAG icon f Frequency indication gauge g Band, frequency, audio program APPENDIX b Tag Info y DSP Program ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ch Name Category Artist Song DSP Album title, frequency, audio program number (absolute) WXYZ-FM TUNED c Album 10: d e ADVANCED OPERATION STEREO TAG Artist / Song BASIC OPERATION WXYZ-FM Call sign, frequency, audio program number (absolute) Category PREPARATION Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in the front panel display or on the GUI screen. • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen. Current sound field program (page 26), frequency, audio program number (absolute) English 33 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Listening to Satellite Radio To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii). Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources. Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children. To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346). To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US). SIRIUS XM Radio Legal SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA”, “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be correct. • When “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed, it means that the connected antenna is old. See page 71 for details. Activating XM Satellite Radio SIRIUS DOCK XM PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO PR Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniTuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 37) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. 34 En Note • The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http:// activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) XM Satellite Radio® operations Category Search mode 1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel category. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during the channel category selection. When you select the category, the first channel in the category is selected. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dXM) to select “XM” as the input source. The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears on the front panel display and GUI screen (page 37). Category search mode Search mode The first channel in the category INTRODUCTION 1 ■ XM Pop 001Preview Category name Channel number Channel name Note y • If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search). • When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. 2 2 • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 37). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 36). ■ All Channel Search mode Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. XM y • You can search for a channel quickly by holding down HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h). Note • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. ■ Direct number access In the All Channel Search mode or Category search mode, press the lNumeric keys to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”. y • To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71). APPENDIX 00880's • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION y y ADVANCED OPERATION Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” (page 36). While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. BASIC OPERATION Note • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or on the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71). PREPARATION XM English 35 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Registering XM Satellite Radio channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel as described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this page. Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode) Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see “Registering preset channels” on this page. Preset channel number XM Registering preset channels 1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations” (page 35). Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 40). y • You can directly select a preset number by pressing a lNumeric keys while calling a preset channel. XM 00880's 2 00880's Clearing preset channels Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). The indicator on the front panel display changes as follows. Currently registered channel number (or “---” if empty) You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite Radio channels. 1 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “XM” is displayed. 2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select “Clear Preset” and then press jENTER. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset station number that you want to clear. XM P01:---<<008 Preset number to which new channel number is registered Channel number to be registered y • By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). • To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN. 3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select the stored preset station number. y • You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric keys. • If you select a preset number being used (currently registered channel number appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. 4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). 36 En XM 008 80's 4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of the selected preset channel. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press rOPTION. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information GUI screen Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the GUI screen. Note d • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71). ■ a Front panel display Ch 008 b All Channel Search Ch Name Category Artist Song c Input DSP PREPARATION Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. 80’s Decades Sanumemo Road to India XM Straight Enhancer Option Menu Hold Data Channel Channel number, channel name Channel category, channel number a Channel number b Search mode (page 35) c Channel name, channel category, artist name, song title d Antenna reception level y • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen. BASIC OPERATION Category INTRODUCTION Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen. ■ Artist / Song ADVANCED OPERATION Artist name, song title, channel number Antenna Antenna reception level, channel number ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DSP Program Current sound field program (page 26), channel number Audio Decoder Current audio decoder (page 28), channel number APPENDIX Back to “Channel” Display example (Antenna) XM Antenna English y • You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. 37 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect tuner. SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna (sold separately) SIRIUS Displaying the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. 2 Press l0 and then lENT to display the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner. “000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the front panel display. Write the Sirius ID below. DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO T AN PR DC 5V ID:________________________________________ To the AC wall outlet 3 y • To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS Information” screen on the GUI screen (page 42) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. • You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information Contact for activation URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) y • Status messages appear on the front panel display or GUI screen during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears. Notes • If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna. • If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner. Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel “0” (see below). Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your subscription. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears on the front panel display. Search mode SIRIUS 184Weather Channel number Channel name y • When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Notes • When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only select “184” or “000”. • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or on the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). 38 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) 2 • You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 42). • If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL SIRIUS” (on the front panel display) and “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” (on the GUI screen) appear. • You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 40). All Channel Search mode Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. SIRIUS 001Hits1 Direct number access In the All Channel Search mode or Category search mode, press the lNumeric keys to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”. y • To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the lNumeric keys or press lENT to cancel (page 41). • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). ADVANCED OPERATION y • You can search for a channel quickly by holding down HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h). Category Search mode 1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel category. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during channel category selection. When you select the category, the first channel in the category is selected. Category search mode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ BASIC OPERATION ■ ■ PREPARATION y Note • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is locked (page 41). – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. INTRODUCTION Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” (page 40). The first channel in the category SIRIUS Pop APPENDIX Category name Note • If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search). 2 English While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). 39 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this page. Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode) Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see “Registering preset channels” on this page. SIRIUS 001Hits1 Registering preset channels 1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations” (page 38). SIRIUS 001Hits1 2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). The indicator on the front panel display changes as follows. Currently registered channel number (or “---” if empty) Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 40). Clearing preset channels You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. 1 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed. 2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select “Clear Preset” and then press jENTER. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset station number that you want to clear. SIRIUS SIRIUS P01:---<<001 Preset number to which new channel number is registered Channel number to be registered y • By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). • To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN. 3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select the stored preset station number. y • You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric keys. • If you select a preset number being used (currently registered channel number appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. 4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). 40 En 001 Hits 1 4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of the selected preset channel. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press rOPTION. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Setting the Parental Lock 6 Press jCursor l / h to select the category of a channel you want to lock. Parental Lock Category Pop Input Setting the code number and the locking channels DSP 7 2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select “Parental Lock” and then press jENTER. 3 Use jCursor l / h (to select a digit to edit) and jCursor k / n (to select a number) to enter the desired 4-digit code number. If you have entered a code number before, enter the same code number. 001 002 003 004 005 SIRIUS Hits 1 The Blend SIRIUS XM Love 40s on 4 50s on 5 Select Cat / Ch Lock / Unlock Press jCursor k / n to select a channel you want to lock. Notes • You can also select a channel by using eCATEGORY l / h or eTUN./CH k / n. • While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed, sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked. 8 Press jENTER to lock the selected channel. A check mark appears next to the locked channel on the GUI screen. You can toggle channel lock and unlock as you press jENTER. Parental Lock Category Pop Channel 006 007 008 009 010 ’60s Vibrations Totally ’70s Big ’80s The Pulse 9 The Bridge ADVANCED OPERATION Parental Lock Enter New PIN 0000 Input DSP Input DSP SIRIUS 7ch Enhancer Edit Set 4 Press jENTER. The confirmation screen appears. 5 Press jENTER again to confirm the code number. “OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears. Select Cat / Ch Lock / Unlock 9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to lock all the desired channels. 10 Press jRETURN repeatedly to exit the “Parental Lock” screen. This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked, this unit is tuned into “184 Weather/Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID”. Tuning into the locked channels Tune into the channel with direct number access (page 39) or Preset Search mode (page 40). When you tune into the locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel display and GUI screen, followed by the following message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the lNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press lENT. APPENDIX Note • If a code number is already registered and you enter the different number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter the correct code number. • If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it using “SR PIN” (page 65). SIRIUS 7ch Enhancer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The entered code number is needed for tuning in the channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down below. Code number: ________________________________ BASIC OPERATION Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed. SIRIUS 7ch Enhancer Channel PREPARATION Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number (PIN) and select the channels to be locked. 1 INTRODUCTION You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode and you search a channel by pressing HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). SIRIUS PIN: 41 En English Note • If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel display or the GUI screen and this unit is tuned into the previously selected channel. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen. Note • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). ■ Front panel display Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes. Channel Display example (Antenna) SIRIUS Antenna y • You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60). • If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals, “ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. ■ GUI screen Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the GUI screen. Channel number, channel name d Category a Channel category, channel number b Ch 001 All Channel Search SIRIUS Hits 1 Pop Sanumemo Road to India Frankie Zipper Ch Name Category Artist Song Composer c Input Artist/Song DSP Artist name, song title, channel number Option Menu Hold Data a Channel number b Search mode (page 39) c Channel name, channel category, artist name, song title, composer name d Antenna reception level Composer Composer name, channel number SIRIUS Straight Enhancer y • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.. Antenna Antenna reception level, channel number DSP Program Current sound field program (page 26) Audio Decoder Current audio decoder (page 28) Back to “Channel” 42 En Using iPod™ Notes • iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using the YDS-11. INTRODUCTION Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 17), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 28). y Controlling iPod in menu browse mode Controlling iPod™ Key j y • “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display. 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the input source. 2 Press tDISPLAY on the remote control. The following screen appears on the GUI screen. Function Subsequent menu k Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu Search backward (Press and hold) f Search forward (Press and hold) a Skip forward b Skip backward Music Videos Input k s Stop e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) t DISPLAY Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) 3 DOCK STRAIGHT Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or “Videos” and then press jCursor h. • Select “Music” to browse music files. • Select “Videos” to browse video files. Note • The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature. APPENDIX p DSP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION w iPod ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your iPod in this mode. BASIC OPERATION You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform the following operations with the remote control. PREPARATION • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display. • For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see the “iPod” section on page 74. • (U.S.A. model only) Once the connection between an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature and this unit is complete, this unit transmits iTunes Tagging information to the iPod (page 32). Switch between Menu browse mode and Simple remote mode Controlling iPod in simple remote mode English You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control your iPod in this mode. 43 En Using iPod™ 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a menu item and then press jENTER to start playback. Menu items of “Music” Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs Menu items of “Videos” Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your iPod. ■ Shuffle/repeat playback When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback. 1 Press tDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 48). 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or “Repeat” and then press jENTER. 4 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired playback style. Play information display Shuffle: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in random order. • Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to play back albums in random order. a b c d e 01:04 –02:27 Input DSP DOCK Straight a Shuffle and repeat icons b (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and (search backward) c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc) d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time e Song title, artist name, album title y • You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by pressing DINFO (or fINFO). • Album arts are available only when the file contains image data. 44 En Repeat: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back repeatedly. • Select “One” to repeat each song. • Select “All” to repeat all songs. Song Made-to-order Artist Frankie Zipper Album Road to India To return to the previous screen, press jRETURN. y • When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ 1 ” or “ ” appears on the GUI screen. Using Bluetooth™ components Note • This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. ■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth™ component Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK) as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. For details on operation of the Bluetooth component, refer to the manual supplied with it. 3 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed (page 48). 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK) as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. 3 Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and then press jENTER. After you execute “Connect”, communication with the Bluetooth component is established. When the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears on the front panel display. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ADVANCED OPERATION To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. y • The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. BASIC OPERATION 5 PREPARATION Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component INTRODUCTION You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. y Volume Trim Connect Pairing Input DSP 4 BLUETOOTH 7ch Enhancer 4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component. English Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and then press jENTER. “Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts. APPENDIX • When you press jENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears on the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component, display the Option menu again, select “Disconnect” and then press jENTER. Option Menu y • To cancel pairing, press jRETURN. • You can also start pairing operation by holding down EMEMORY on the front panel. 45 En Using USB storage devices You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs). Notes • You can play back only the files stored in the first partition. • Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices. Playback of the USB storage device ■ Play information display a 1 Connect your USB storage device to the VUSB port on the front panel (page 18). b c 2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dUSB) to select “USB” as the input source. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. d e 00:30 Song Made-to-order Artist Frankie Zipper Album Road to India Input DSP USB Straight Enhancer USB Road to India Symphony 01 Symphony 02 Symphony 03 Take–Hero Input DSP USB Straight Enhancer If you have connected the USB storage device to this unit before, playback of the music file played at the last time automatically starts. 3 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a music file to play back. • To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n. • To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or jENTER. • To return to the previous menu, press j l. Press jENTER to start play back. You can also perform the following operations with remote control. Key a Shuffle and repeat icons b (playback) c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc) d Elapsed time e Song title, artist name, album title y • Album arts are available only when the file contains image data. Shuffle/repeat playback 1 Press rOPTION on the remote control while “USB” is selected as the input source. The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 48). 2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or “Repeat” and then press jENTER. 3 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired playback style. Function a Skip forward during playback b Skip backward during playback Shuffle: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in random order. • Select “On” to play back music files in random order. k s Stop p Play Repeat: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back repeatedly. • Select “One” to repeat each music file. • Select “All: to repeat all music files in the folder. y • When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ 1 ” or “ ” appears on the GUI screen. 4 46 En To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. Other functions Using the sleep timer Press qSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press qSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. Turn on the TV. Other HDMI control devices are also turned on in conjunction with the TV. If not, turn on them manually. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. 5 Select this unit as the input source of the TV. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. 6 Turn on the HDMI control device (DVD player or Blu-ray player) connected to this unit. For this unit, check that the DVD player or Blu-ray player is selected as an input source of this unit. If not, select it as an input source. For external devices, check that the TV screen shows the playback picture of the player. 7 Check if the HDMI control function works (turn on this unit or adjust the volume level using the remote control of the TV). When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front panel display lights up. Press qSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display. Using the HDMI™ control function • In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV may be effective. – “HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit. – The HDMI control function is enables on the TV. y • This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 23) when you select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon. y • The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player. • If you connect this unit and your DVD player, Blu-ray player or HD DVD player (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control the device. • We suggest that you use products (TV, DVD player, Blu-ray player or HD DVD player) from the same manufacturer. 2 Enable the HDMI control function on each device. For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 59). For external devices, refer to the manual supplied with each device to enable the HDMI control function. English Turn on all devices connected to this unit with HDMI. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your device. APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Please refer to the manual supplied with your TV and check the following. – The HDMI control function is enabled on your TV. – This unit is appropriately connected to your TV. Note <Note> ADVANCED OPERATION You can operate the following functions of this unit with the remote control of your TV when connecting this unit and the TV (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI. • Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with TV) • Adjusting the volume • Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or TV) BASIC OPERATION 4 The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. PREPARATION Turn off the TV. Other HDMI control devices are also turned off in conjunction with the TV. If not, turn off them manually. INTRODUCTION 3 y • You do not need to perform steps 1 through 2 from the next time. 47 En ADVANCED OPERATION Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu) This unit has an Option menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure for setting the Option menu items is described below. 1 2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select the desired input source. Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for the selected input source is displayed. For details about the Option menu items of each input source, see “Option menu items” on this page. Option menu items The following menu items are provided for each input source. Input Source HDMI1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV 5-6 Volume Trim AUDIO1/2 Volume Trim V-AUX Volume Trim PHONO Volume Trim USB Volume Trim Signal Info Shuffle Repeat iPod (DOCK) Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat Note BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Volume Trim Connect/ Disconnect Pairing • In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to select the current input source again. TUNER Volume Trim Audio Mode Auto Preset SIRIUS Volume Trim Clear Preset Parental Lock XM Volume Trim Clear Preset MULTI CH Volume Trim Video Out Option Menu Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info Input DSP 3 Menu item HDMI 1 Straight Press jCursor k / n to select the desired menu item and then press jENTER. Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed. 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the desired setting and then press jENTER 5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN. Video Out Clear Preset Details of the menu items are as follows: y • The default settings are marked with “*”. Volume Trim Input source: All Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB (in 0.5 dB steps) Reduces any change in volume when switching input sources by correcting volume differences between input sources. You can set this parameter for each input source. 48 En Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu) Decoder Mode Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*, DTS Auto DTS Automatically selects audio input signals. Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. Extended Surround Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off Notes • Video information • Signal Info Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, USB • Audio information • Format Channel Format of digital audio signals. Message Error messages about HDMI signals and HDMI components. See the following for details of the error messages. • HDMI error message (appears only when an error has occurred) • HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Device Over The number of HDMI components connected is over the limit. Out of Res. The connected monitor is not compatible with the video input signal. Audio Mode Input source: TUNER Choices: Auto*, Mono Sets FM (or HD Radio) broadcasting receiving mode. Auto Mono Receives in stereo mode by priority. Receives in monaural mode. You can get a better reception in monaural mode. Note • (U.S.A. model only) Select “Auto” to tune into HD Radio stations. When “Mono” is selected, you can tune into analog stations only. Auto Preset Input source: TUNER Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers them as preset stations (page 30). y • (U.S.A. model only) Automatically detects FM and AM HD Radio stations and analog FM radio stations and registers them as preset stations. Clear Preset Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS Clears preset station (TUNER: page 31, XM: page 36, SIRIUS: page 40). Parental Lock Input source: SIRIUS Set the Parental Lock (page 41). 49 En English The number of input signal channels (front/surround/LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. Format and resolution of video output signal. APPENDIX Displays information on audio and video signals on the GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items to be displayed using jCursor k / n. Video Out ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Off Format and resolution of video input signal. ADVANCED OPERATION EX/ES Video In BASIC OPERATION PLIIx Music The bit rate of input signal per second. PREPARATION PLIIx Movie Automatically selects the most suitable decoder according to whether a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when two surround back speakers are connected. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two surround back speakers are connected. Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1channel. Always reproduces original signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. Bitrate • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input. • The bit rate may vary during playback. Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. Auto The sampling frequency per second in analog-to-digital conversion. INTRODUCTION Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction. Sampling Frequency Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu) Shuffle Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB Choices: iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums USB: Off*, On Changes the shuffle playback style. Repeat Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB Choices: Off*, One, All Changes the repeat playback style. Connect / Disconnect Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction This function enables this unit to output video signals when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below to select the video to be output during an audio reproduction. 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for the selected input source is displayed. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out” and then press jENTER. Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component. Pairing Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (page 45). Video Out Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH Choices: AV1 to AV6, V-AUX, Off* Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction” on this page. 50 En Video;;;;;;Off 4 Press jCursor l / h to select a video input jack to be used during an audio reproduction. – AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) – AV3-6 (VIDEO) – V-AUX (VIDEO) – Off (no video output) 5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Setting sound field parameters y • The default settings are marked with “*”. CINEMA DSP basic parameters y DSP Level • You cannot configure the parameters when “Memory Guard” is set to “On” (page 61). Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB 2 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. 3 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then press jENTER. 4 Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP Parameter” and then press jENTER. Sound field program Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as follows. • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. →Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. →Reduce the effect level. Dialogue Lift Choices: DSP Parameter Sound field parameters 5 Set values Press jCursor k / n to select “Program Name” and then press jCursor l / h to select a sound field program to edit. Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to edit and then press jCursor l / h to change the setting. For details on functions and adjustable ranges of the sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters” on this page. The ideal dialogue position If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”. Move up to the ideal dialogue position y 7 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON SCREEN. Notes • This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to “Presence” (page 57). • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. 3D DSP Choices: On*, Off When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use sound field programs in 3D mode. 51 En English To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select “Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press jCursor h again to execute the initialization or jCursor l to cancel it. When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest. The position gets higher as you increase the value. APPENDIX • Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other sound field program parameters. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 Sci-Fi PLIIx Movie 0dB 16ms 1.0 2ms 1.0 ADVANCED OPERATION Program Name Decode Type DSP Level P. Initial Delay P. Room Size Sur. Initial Delay Sur. Room Size 0* to 5 Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. BASIC OPERATION Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions of sources or rooms by setting the parameters. Sound field parameters Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Note Source sound • This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to “Presence” (page 57). ■ Parameters for adjusting early-reflected sound Level Sound field parameters for advanced configurations Level Early Time Time Sound source Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial Delay Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to 49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial Delay) Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation time is long. Early-reflected sound Level Level Original source sound Time Delay Time Delay Sound source Small = 0.1 ■ Large = 2.0 Parameters for defining attenuation characteristics of early-reflected sound Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back Liveness Adjustable range: 0 to 10 Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation time is long. Source sound Live Large = 99ms Dead Time Level Small = 1ms Level Reflecting Time y • We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field when you adjust the delay time. ■ Parameters for specifying room size Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur. Back Room Size Small reflected sound Large reflected sound Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0 Produces different senses of sound expansion according to room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus, different senses of sound expansion can be created by changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is defined as twice larger than the original room size. 52 En Small = 0 Large = 10 Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound Reverb Level Adjustable range: 0 to100% Reverb Time Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s Source sound (dB) Reverb Level Rear reverberation Early reflections 60dB 60dB Time Time Time Reverb Time Short reverberation Long reverberation Parameters for certain sound field programs ■ Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs Decode Type Sound source Choices: Large = 5.0s Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound field programs. Note Reverb Delay Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms Level ■ Parameter for 2ch Stereo Direct Choices: Auto*, Off Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Source sound ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time. • You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field programs. – Mono Movie – Sports – Action Game – Roleplaying Game ADVANCED OPERATION Small = 1.0s PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema BASIC OPERATION Reverb Time PREPARATION Rear reverberation Source sound INTRODUCTION Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation. Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or shorter for a sound source or room with more echo. Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to create more echo. Level ■ (dB) Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble” tone controls are both set to 0 dB. Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control. 60dB Time Reverb Delay Reverb Time Parameters for 7ch Stereo Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level / Presence R Level APPENDIX ■ Reverberation Adjustable range: 0 to 100% 53 En English Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo program. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Editing surround decoders/sound field programs ■ Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch Enhancer Effect Level Choices: High*, Low Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. When the high-frequency signals of the source is emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”. Decoder parameters You can customize decoder effects by setting the following parameters. For details about the types of decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 28). ■ Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music Panorama Choices: Off*, On Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Dimension Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3 Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Center Width Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7 You can spread the center sound toward left and right according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker. ■ Parameter for Neo:6 Music Center Image Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0 Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. 54 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus. For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages. Function Page Sets items for speakers. 56 Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 56 Manual Setup Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 58 Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between speakers and the listening position. 58 Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 58 Test Tone Generates test tones. 58 Sets various items for sound outputs. 58 Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 58 Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 59 HDMI Auto Lipsync Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals. 59 Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto. 59 Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output. 59 Sets various items for HDMI and display. 59 Sets various items for input sources. 59 HDMI Control Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports the HDMI control function is connected with this unit. 59 Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. 59 Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals. 59 Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input signals. 59 Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog video input signals. 60 Sound Setup Function Setup HDMI Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display. 60 Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display. 60 Front Panel Display Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 60 GUI Position Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video monitor. 60 Display 60 Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level. 60 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 60 60 Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel display. 61 Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2. 61 Zone2 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 61 Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 61 55 En English Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. Input Rename APPENDIX Sets items for volumes. Adaptive DRC Volume ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Speaker Level ADVANCED OPERATION 56 BASIC OPERATION 56 Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. PREPARATION Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. Speaker Configuration INTRODUCTION Menu/Submenu Speaker Setup Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Menu/Submenu Function Page DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 61 Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 61 Basic operation of the Setup menu 5 The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen and front panel display. GUI screen Setup Menu Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit and then press jCursor l / h to change the setting. Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup” take up a full screen. To display other items in “Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n. Example (Speaker Configuration) Speaker Setup Sound Setup Function Setup DSP Parameter Memory Guard Speaker Configuration Front Speaker Small Large Front panel display ;SpeakerSetup In this section, procedures of setting menus using the video monitor are described. 1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. 2 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then press jENTER. The Setup menu appears on the video monitor. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired menu then press jENTER. Items of the selected menu are displayed. y • To configure other items, repeat step 5. 6 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON SCREEN. Note • In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to select the current input source again. Speaker Setup You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO) for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup” for manual adjustment. y • The default settings are marked with “*”. Example (Function Setup) Auto Setup Function Setup Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic characteristics or the room, which are automatically measured. For details on operations, see page 20. HDMI Display Volume Input Rename Zone2 y • To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN. 4 If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select the desired submenu then press jENTER. Example (Volume) Volume Adaptive DRC Max Volume Initial Volume 56 En Off +16.5dB Off Manual Setup Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on manually set parameters. After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup” menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if necessary. ■ Speaker Configuration Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) y Note • If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”. Extra Speaker Assignment Center Speaker Choices: Choices: Zone2*, Presence, None None, Small*, Large Selects the application for the EXTRA SP terminals. Sets the size of center speaker. Zone2 None Presence None Small Note • When setting “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, the surround back channel signals for main output is separately output from other channels. Large LFE / Bass Out Choices: Subwoofer, Front, Both* Select this when no center speaker is connected. Center channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Low-frequency components of center channel are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound) channel or other channels. The output status is as follows. Surround Speaker LFE channel signals None Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers Output Not output Not output Front Not output Output Not output Both Output Not output Not output Small Low-frequency components of other channel signals Parameter Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers Large Select this when no surround speakers are connected. Surround channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. “Surround Back Speaker” automatically switches to “None” when this is selected. Select this when small surround speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of surround channels are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when large surround speakers are connected. [1] [2] [2] y Front Not output [3] [2] • When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Both [3] [4] [2] Surround Back Speaker Choices: [1] [2] [3] Front Speaker Choices: Small, Large* Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers. Small None Large x 1 Small x 1 Large x 2 Small x 2 Select this when no surround back speaker are connected. Surround back channel signals are output from the surround L/R speakers and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled, they are output from the surround L/R speakers and front speakers. Select this when one large surround back speaker is connected. Select this when one small surround back speaker is connected. Select this when two large surround back speakers are connected. Select this when two small surround back speakers are connected. y • When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”, “PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode (page 28) are not available. 57 En English Large Select this when small speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of the front left and right channels are output from a subwoofer. Select this when large speakers are connected. None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2* Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers. APPENDIX [4] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small”. Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers are set to “Large”. Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small”. Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Subwoofer ADVANCED OPERATION Subwoofer None, Small*, Large Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers. BASIC OPERATION Parameter Choices: PREPARATION Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the speakers in the second zone. Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the presence speakers. Disables the EXTRA SP terminals. INTRODUCTION • The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size: “Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Bass Crossover Frequency Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x 1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is output from a subwoofer or front speakers. If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. Subwoofer Phase Choices: Normal*, Reverse Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Normal Reverse ■ Select this not to change the phase of your subwoofer. Select this to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Speaker Level Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step) Defaults: 0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R) –1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR) Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending on the number of speakers connected. y • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears instead of “SBL” and “SBR”. • You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test Tone” to “On” (on this page). • If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. ■ Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of each speaker. Unit Choices: feet (ft) meters (m) feet (ft)*, meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in feet. Displays the speaker distance in meters. ■ Equalizer Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic equalizer. EQ Type Select Choices: Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off Selects an equalizer type. Auto PEQ GEQ Off Uses a parametric equalizer selected in “Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the currently used parametric equalizer are displayed below “Auto PEQ”. Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER to adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Not use a graphic equalizer. GEQ Channels Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left, Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Back Right Choices: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step) Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust signal levels in 7 frequency ranges. To adjust the signal level within each range, press jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while “Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h to adjust the signal level. ■ Test Tone Choices: Off*, On Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone. Off On Not generate test tones. Generates test tones. Sound Setup You can set various items for sound outputs. ■ Dynamic Range Choices: Min/Auto, STD, Max* FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR / SWFR / PR.L / PR.R Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for reproducing bitstream signals. Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft) Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R) 2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR) 2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR) Min/Auto y • Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings (page 56). • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears instead of “SBL” and “SBR”. 58 En STD (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. Sets the standard dynamic range recommended for regular home use. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Max Outputs sound without adjusting the dynamic range of the input signals. HDMI Auto Lipsync Choices: Off*, On Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video signals when a TV that supports an automatic lip-sync function is connected to this unit. Off On Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto Lipsync” is set to “On”. The actual correction time is displayed under in “Auto Delay” field and an offset time set by the user in “Offset” field. Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when the connected TV does not support the automatic lipsync function or you set “HDMI Auto Lipsync” to “Off”. Function Setup You can set various items for HDMI and display. HDMI Control On, Off* y • This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. • To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks must be selected before switching to standby. • When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up. In this state, this unit consumes up to 3 watts of power even on standby. ■ Audio Output Choices: Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks. Amplifier Outputs HDMI sound signals form the speakers connected to this unit. TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Sound output from the speakers connected to this unit is muted. Amplifier + Outputs HDMI sound signals from the TV speakers connected to this unit and the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Note Enables the HDMI control function. Disables the HDMI control function. • This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. ■ Resolution Choices: Through*, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted from analog video input signals and output from the HDMI OUT jack. Notes • Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog video signals cannot be upscaled. • When a video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit, this unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution. • If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set “MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 65) and try again. English • The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby. – when the HDMI control function is on – when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working • When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this unit. y APPENDIX Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports the HDMI control function is connected with this unit. When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the video monitor even when this unit is on standby. On Off y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can set items for HDMI. Choices: Off • Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV vary depending on specifications of the monitor. HDMI ■ Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. ADVANCED OPERATION Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) On BASIC OPERATION Auto Delay On, Off* Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the video monitor even when this unit is on standby. PREPARATION Select this when the connected TV does not support the automatic lip-sync function or you do not use the automatic lip-sync function. Set the correction time in “Manual Delay”. Select this when the connected TV supports the automatic lip-sync function. Fine adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay”. Standby Through Choices: INTRODUCTION ■ Lipsync Adjusts delay between video output and audio output. ■ 59 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog video input signals by a video conversion function. Through Outputs the video signals without changing the aspect ratio. 16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on the right and left sides of the TV screen. Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and left of images to fit on the TV screen. Volume You can set items for volumes. ■ Adaptive DRC Choices: Notes • You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set to “Through”. • This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3. • You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input. Display You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel display. Auto, Off* Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range Auto Off Output level Aspect Choices: Output level ■ Auto Input level Volume : low Auto Off Off Input level Volume : high Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Not adjust the dynamic range automatically. y • This setting is also effective for headphones. Dimmer Adjustable range: –4 to 0* Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is darkened. Note • The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode even if the value is increased. Front Panel Display Scroll Choices: Continuous*, Once Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of characters exceed a display area of the front panel display. Continuous Once Repeatedly displays all characters by scrolling. Displays all characters by scrolling once, halts scrolling and then displays first 14 characters. GUI Position Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5 Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left), set this value smaller. 60 En ■ Max Volume Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5 dB (default). ■ Initial Volume Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when this unit was set to standby is applied. Note • When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Input Rename DSP Parameter Selecting a name to be displayed from templates Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new name from the following templates. – Satellite – VCR – Tape – MD – PC – iPod – HD DVD – “blank” jCursor l / h jCursor k / n jENTER Choices: Off*, On Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental alteration. Off On Not protect settings. Protects the Setup menu settings (except for “Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and “Memory Guard”). Note • When this parameter is switched to “On”, “ corner of the Setup menu screen. ” appears at the top left BASIC OPERATION Entering an original name Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters by selecting one character at a time with the following key operations. Memory Guard PREPARATION – Blu-ray – DVD – SetTopBox – Game – TV – DVR – CD – CD-R You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For details, see page 51. INTRODUCTION Changes input source names to be displayed on the front panel display. Selects a character to edit. Selects a character to enter. Enters a selected character. The following characters are available for input. A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space ADVANCED OPERATION Zone2 Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2. y • These parameters are available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to “Zone2” (page 57). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Zone2 Max Volume Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2, so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. ■ Zone2 Initial Volume Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) APPENDIX Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2 when the power of Zone2 unit is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time when the Zone2 unit was set to standby is applied. Note • If you set “Zone2 Max Volume” and “Zone2 Initial Volume”, the setting of “Zone2 Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, if you set “Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2 Initial Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time the Zone2 unit is turned on. English 61 En Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signal can be sent to the second zone. If you want to output sounds to Zone2, connect an external component to the AV5-6, AUDIO1-2 or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this unit by both HDMI and analog connections. Using the internal amplifier of this unit Connecting Zone2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these products. Up to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see “Transmitting/receiving remote control signals” (page 17). Important safety notice The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your unit. Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2” (page 57). Using an external amplifier Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE2 OUT jacks EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE Amplifier Second zone (Zone2) Main zone Second zone (Zone2) DVD player (etc.) This unit Main zone Remote control y This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jack Infrared signal receiver To the REMOTE IN jack Note • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 62 En • You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP terminals as the front speaker system of another zone. • When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume of the Zone2 speakers (page 61). Using multi-zone configuration Controlling Zone2 PREPARATION Switching to the Zone2 operation mode Before controlling Zone2 by using the control keys on the front panel or on the remote control, follow the procedure below to switch this unit to the Zone2 operation mode. To control Zone2 by using the front panel control keys BASIC OPERATION ■ Press CZONE2 CONTROL while Zone2 is turned on. The ZONE2 indicator flashes on the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ADVANCED OPERATION ZONE 2 Flashes Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the main zone operation mode. ■ To control Zone2 by using the remote control Switch bMAIN/ZONE2 to the “ZONE2” position. Operations in the Zone2 operation mode ■ INTRODUCTION You can select and control Zone2 by using the control keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source. • Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is selected as the input source) • Tuning into the desired channel (when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is selected as the input source) (U.S.A. model only) • Adjusting the volume of Zone2 (when Zone2 speakers are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals). • Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 43) or Bluetooth features (page 45) in Zone2. • Select “SIRIUS” to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio features (page 38) in Zone2. • Select “XM” to use the XM Satellite Radio features (page 34) in Zone2. Turning on or set Zone2 to standby Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER). Operating Zone2 APPENDIX ■ English Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select the desired input source. • Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2”, “VAUX” or “PHONO” to listen to the input source in Zone2. • Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features (page 30) in Zone2. • Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 46) in Zone2. 63 En Controlling other components with the remote control You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for controlling external components are as follows: cSOURCE POWER Turns on and off an external component. Input source jCursor, ENTER, RETURN Operates the menus of external components. kExternal component operation keys Function as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. lNumeric keys Function as numeric keys of an external component. mTV control keys INPUT MUTE TV VOL +/– TV CH +/– POWER [USB] — — — [DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011 [TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007 [SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5017 [XM] Tuner Yamaha 5009 [MULTI] — — — • An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically selected according to selection of the scenes (page 23). Setting remote control codes • You can use mTV control keys only for controls of TV regardless of selected input sources. • You need to set the remote control code first to control external components. • The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Default remote control code settings Category Default code y Switches visual inputs of TV Mutes audio of TV Controls the volume of TV Switches channels of TV Turns on and off TV y Input source Manufacturer “—” indicates no assignment tDISPLAY Switches between the screens of external components. ■ Category Manufacturer You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. You should perform each step within 1 minute after the previous step. 1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. nTRANSMIT blinks twice. 2 Press the desired dInput selection key. 3 Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote control code. Once the remote control code is registered, nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. Default code [HDMI 1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018 [HDMI 2] — — — [HDMI 3] — — — [HDMI 4] — — — [AV 1] — — — You can reset all remote control codes to the factory default settings. 1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as a tip of a ballpoint pen. nTRANSMIT blinks twice. Resetting all remote control codes [AV 2] — — — [AV 3] CD Yamaha 5013 [AV 4] — — — [AV 5] — — — [AV 6] — — — 2 Press iON SCREEN. [AUDIO 1] — — — 3 [AUDIO 2] — — — [V-AUX] — — — Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”. Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. [PHONO] — — — 64 En Advanced setup In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or initialize user settings. 2 While holding down OSTRAIGHT on the front panel, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF. Keep holding down OSTRAIGHT until “ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel display. ADVANCEDSETUP 3 4 Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4. 5 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to standby. The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. y • Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an actual display screen. SP IMP. -XXX Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN* REMOTE ID -XXX Choices: ID1*, ID2 You can check the firmware of this unit and update the firmware using the USB port on the front panel. Select the following parameter in step 3 above. FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware of this unit. To update the firmware, select “FIRM UPDATE” and then press OSTRAIGHT. Notes • Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware. • Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. SR PIN -XXX Displays the firmware of this unit. Choices: RESET, CANCEL* Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS Satellite tuner. BI AMP - XXX Choices: ON, OFF* Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12. Choices: ON*, OFF Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals to an external component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE function is selected. Setting a remote control ID Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted operation of the other amplifier. “ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the the advanced setup menu. Press oCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. nTRANSMIT blinks twice. 2 Press iON SCREEN. MON.CHK - XXXX Choices: YES*, SKIP Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack. English 1 APPENDIX SCENE IR -XXX VERXXX.XXX.XXX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to the same setting. ADVANCED OPERATION Selects output impedance of this unit according to connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”. Updating the firmware BASIC OPERATION Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to change. The default setting are marked with “*”. DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL* Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can select an initialization method from the following. DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field programs VIDEO Video conversion settings (resolution/ aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI display position ALL All CANCEL Cancellation of initialization PREPARATION Set this unit to standby. Choices: INTRODUCTION 1 INIT-XXXXXXXXX 65 En Advanced setup 3 Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Press lNumeric keys to enter “5019”. To switch to ID2: Press lNumeric keys to enter “5020”. Once the remote control code is registered, nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. y • If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control code of this unit) is set to “ID1”. 66 En APPENDIX Troubleshooting General Problem Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — This unit suddenly enters the standby mode The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 65 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit and play the source again. — The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. 19 The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 65 (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 11 This unit cannot be turned off. The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected on the video monitor. Select an appropriate video input on the video monitor. — The external video component is connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks while your video monitor is connected to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks. Connect the external video component to the video input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect the video monitor to the HDMI OUT jack. This unit outputs the video signals not supported by the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Displays the advanced setup menu and select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters. 65 Displays the advanced setup menu and set “MON.CHK” to “YES”. 65 Video signals are input from a game console while your video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. 14 Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks. 14 This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. APPENDIX The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. ADVANCED OPERATION This unit does not operate properly. BASIC OPERATION Remedy PREPARATION See page Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. 14, 15 English 67 En Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page The picture is disturbed. The video software is copy-protected. No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 15 No appropriate input source has been selected. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select the desired input source. 23 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. 23 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check the input signal format. If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback component is properly connected to this unit (or a proper input source is selected). If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format cannot be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 82 “Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to “TV”. Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI → Audio Output) to the other setting. 59 A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to “Auto”. 48 When a monaural source sound field program is applied, sound of all channels are output from the center speaker for some surround decoders. Try another sound field program. 26 The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12, 15 Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change the input source to another one. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and enables output of that speaker. 6, 23, 26, 56 The volume of that speaker is set to minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level). 58 This unit is in the straight decode mode. Press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) to turn off the straight decode mode. 29 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 26 The speaker is malfunction. Check the speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction. — Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. No sound is output from a specific speaker. 68 En Troubleshooting Problem Remedy See page “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is being played. Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”. 57 “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or “Front” and a 2-channel source is being played. Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”. 57 The source does not contain low frequency signals. Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”. 49 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its operating instructions. — Noise/hum noise is heard. Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO 1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. 64 “Memory Guard!” is displayed and the setting cannot be changed. “Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — 15, 49 BASIC OPERATION “Extended Surround” in the Option menu is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “Extended Surround” set to “Auto”. PREPARATION No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. INTRODUCTION No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 69 En Troubleshooting HDMI™ Problem No picture or sound. Cause Remedy See page The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 82 Tuner (FM/AM) Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy You are too far from the station transmitter or the input from the antenna is weak. See page Check the antenna connections. 18 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — Switch to monaural mode. 49 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station or an input from the antenna is weak. Replace an outdoor antenna with more sensitive multi element antenna. — Tune in manually or by direct frequency tuning. 30 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 18 Use the manual tuning method. 30 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 18 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 18 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — See page There are buzzing and whining noises. HD Radio™ Reception (U.S.A. model only) Problem Cause Remedy This unit cannot receive the HD Radio signals of the selected radio station. The radio station provides analog FM/AM radio service only. Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio service. 32 The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. — “Audio Mode” in the Option menu is set to “Mono”. 70 En Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. — Set “Audio Mode” to “Auto”. 49 Troubleshooting Problem Cause The radio station provides one audio program only. HD Radio information does not appear. The radio station does not provide the information. See page Remedy See page INTRODUCTION This unit cannot select other audio programs than the main program. Remedy iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only) Status message “YDS-10” does not support tag file transfer. Cause Tag data is not saved because of invalid data. Tag Already Stored Tag data for the same content has been already saved. Tag Storage full Remedy — See page — Tag data cannot be stored because the internal memory of this unit is full. Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. — iPod full Tags cannot be stored Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod because the HDD space of your iPod is full. Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make room and try again. — Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your iPod. Check if the iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11) properly. — Storing Tag Tag data is being stored in the internal memory of this unit. Transferring Tag data is being transferred to your iPod. Tag(s)Sent Tag data has been transferred to your iPod. APPENDIX The selected HR Radio program (or song being played) does not support the iTunes Tagging feature. ADVANCED OPERATION Insufficient Data Use “YDS-11” to transfer tag data from this unit to your iPod. BASIC OPERATION Tag data cannot be transferred to your iPod when it is station in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS10). Cause PREPARATION Problem XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message CHECK XM TUNER Cause Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is connected to this unit. See page 34 English The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected to this unit. Remedy 71 En Troubleshooting Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable has become damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. 34 LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal. This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this unit may not respond to some operations while this message is displayed. This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or XM information on the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level. 37 NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal. Something may be blocking the XM antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed. Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or XM information on the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level. See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information. 37 CHANNEL OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select another channel. — CHANNEL NOT AUTHORIZED You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel that is blocked or that you cannot receive with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346. — CHANNEL NOT AVAILABLE The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. — UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit has detected a XM CNP1000 which is not compatible with this unit. If you have connected the XM Mini-Tuner (CNP2000) and see this message, set this unit to standby, disconnect and reconnect the XM MiniTuner Home Dock and re-install the Mini-Tuner in the Home Dock and turn on this unit. If you continue to see this message with the XM Mini-Tuner, contact XM Satellite Radio at http://xmradio.com/ or 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800967-2346). If you have an incompatible XM CNP1000, contact XM for information on upgrading to the XM MiniTuner. — ---- No artist name or song title is available for this selection. No action required. — 72 En Troubleshooting SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) Status message Cause Remedy See page SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the SiriusConnect tuner. The message disappears normally within several tens of seconds. — CHECK SIRIUS TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly. Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit. 38 The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. 38 NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit supports, 38 ACQUIRING SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or SIRIUS information on the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level. 42 UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel list. Wait until the updating is complete. — The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the subscription. 38 F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the firmware. Wait until the updating is complete. — CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the selected channel. URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) 38 Select another channel. 38 Select another channel. 38 SUBSCRIPTION UPDATED The subscription information is updated. INVALID CHANNEL The selected channel is currently out of service. Not Available The operation you made is not available. APPENDIX 38 ADVANCED OPERATION Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner. BASIC OPERATION The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. PREPARATION ANTENNA ERROR INTRODUCTION If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. English 73 En Troubleshooting Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 65 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 64 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 64 If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the dInput selection keys on the remote control again. When the key does not work during Option menu or Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for the current menu operation again. — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. iPod™ Note • In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod (page 17). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 74 En Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 17 Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 43 Use an iPod supported by this unit. — Troubleshooting Status message Cause Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. See page 43 Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Bluetooth™ Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of establishing the connection. BASIC OPERATION Canceled The pairing is canceled. BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Not Found No Bluetooth components are found during a pairing process. Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check whether your Bluetooth component is set to the paring mode and then try again. 45 No Bluetooth components are found during a Bluetooth connection. Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned on and then try again. 45 Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters (33 feet) of this unit and then try again. 45 USB The music files and folder cannot be browsed. Remedy See page The music files and folders are stored the locations other than the FAT area. Place the music files and folders in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB storage device. — This unit cannot recognize some characters used in the file name or folder name. Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then try again. — The USB storage device is not compatible with mass storage class (except USB HDDs). Use a USB storage device that is compatible with mass storage class (except USB HDDs). — This unit does not recognize the USB storage device properly. Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19 75 En English The USB storage device cannot be recognized. Cause APPENDIX The pairing is completed. ADVANCED OPERATION Completed Problem PREPARATION Status message INTRODUCTION Disconnected Remedy Troubleshooting Status message Cause Remedy See page USB Connected Your USB storage device is connected. Disconnected Your USB storage device has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB storage device. — This unit recognizes the USB storage device as an illegal device. Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19 This unit cannot access your USB storage device. Try another USB storage device. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of this unit. Access Error Unable to play The data is invalid. — 18, 19 Try resetting your USB storage device. — Try another USB storage device. — Auto Setup (YPAO) Notes • • • • If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again. Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct. If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. Before Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 20 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61 During Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11 E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround channels are detected. Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11 E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/ R channels are detected. Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. If you connect only one surround back speaker, connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack. 11 E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed accurately due to loud ambient noise. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. When using surround back speakers, you need to connect surround L/R speakers. 11 E-6:CHECK SUR. 76 En Troubleshooting Error message Cause Remedy See page The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto Setup”. 20 E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 20 10, 11 The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha dealer or service center. — E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was canceled due to an inappropriate user operation. Run “Auto Setup” again. 20 E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 20 PREPARATION Check whether the speakers are properly placed and connected. INTRODUCTION E-7:NO MIC After Auto Setup Cause Remedy See page Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker. If they are correct, the speakers work properly even when this message is displayed. 12 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all speakers are placed in a similar environment. — Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 12 We recommended that you use speakers with the same or similar specifications. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. — W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected during measurement with “Extra Speaker Assignment” set to “Presence”. Check the presence speaker connections and perform measurement again. If presence speakers are not connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to other than “Presence”. 11, 57 APPENDIX Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. ADVANCED OPERATION W-1:OUT OF PHASE BASIC OPERATION Error message English 77 En Glossary ■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects. ■ ■ Bi-amplification connection A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. 78 En Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. Glossary ■ DSD ■ DTS 96/24 ■ DTS Digital Surround DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Bluray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS-HD Master Audio LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 79 En English DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ APPENDIX ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ■ BASIC OPERATION DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1channel format. FLAC This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. PREPARATION DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ INTRODUCTION Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals input from the HDMI jack. Glossary ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. 80 En Sound field program information ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ADVANCED OPERATION Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor. APPENDIX ■ PREPARATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. ■ INTRODUCTION ■ Elements of a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument. CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems. English ■ CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. 81 En Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. y • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following connections: – multi-channel analog audio input (page 16) – digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • 480i/60 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz 82 En Specifications FM SECTION • Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3% • Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz GENERAL ADVANCED OPERATION • Power Supply ..........................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz • Power Consumption ................................................... 400 W/500 VA • Standby Power Consumption (HDMI Control: Off, Standby Through: Off) ............ 0.2 W or less (HDMI Control: On, Standby Through: On) No Repeat................................................................ 1.2 W or less Repeat......................................................................... 3 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm (17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in) • Weight .................................................................... 11.1 kg (24.5 lbs) BASIC OPERATION • Video Signal Type (Gray Back) ............................................... NTSC • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ...................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ........................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off) ............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion: Off) .................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB PREPARATION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 120 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................140/175/205/250 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.25 dB • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.0 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small) .................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT .................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AUDIO OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT) .............................................................................. 86 dB or more AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ............................................................................ 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB • Tone Control (Front Speakers) Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small) ..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................... 24 dB/oct. INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX English 83 En Index ■ Numerics 2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 27 3D DSP, sound field parameter ..................... 51 5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 28 7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28 ■ A Action Game, sound field program ............... 27 Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 60 Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 24 Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 24 Advanced setup .............................................. 65 Adventure, sound field program .................... 26 All Channel Search mode, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39 All Channel Search mode, XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35 AM antenna connection ................................. 18 AM tuning ..................................................... 30 Analog audio jack .......................................... 13 ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5 Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 60 AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5 Audio and video player connection ............... 15 Audio jack ..................................................... 13 AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ................................................... 4 Audio Mode, Option menu ............................ 49 AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5 Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 59 Audio player connection ................................ 16 Auto Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............... 59 Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 49 Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 76 Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 56 Automatic setup ............................................. 20 AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5 AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5 ■ B Basic operation, Setup menu ......................... 56 Bass Crossover Frequency, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 65 Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12 Bluetooth component playback ..................... 45 Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection ................................................. 17 Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 75 ■ C Category Search mode, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39 Category Search mode, XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35 Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 27 Center Image, decoder parameter .................. 54 Center Level, sound field parameter .............. 53 Center speaker ............................................... 10 Center Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Center Width, decoder parameter .................. 54 Chamber, sound field program ...................... 27 Changing information on the front panel display ....................................................... 25 CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 29 CINEMA DSP 3D indicator, front panel display ...................................... 6 CINEMA DSP indicator, front panel display ...................................... 6 Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 49 COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13 CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7 COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13 84 En Connect, Option menu ...................................50 Connecting audio and video player ................15 Connecting audio player ................................16 Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ......................................................17 Connecting external amplifier ........................17 Connecting external decoder ..........................16 Connecting FM antenna .................................18 Connecting iPod universal dock ....................17 Connecting multi-format player .....................16 Connecting power cable .................................19 Connecting projector ......................................14 Connecting set-top box ..................................15 Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ....................38 Connecting speaker ........................................11 Connecting speaker cable ...............................12 Connecting TV monitor .................................14 Connecting USB storage device ....................18 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ......34 Connecting Zone2 ..........................................62 Connections ....................................................10 Controlling other component, remote control ...........................................64 Controlling Zone2 ..........................................63 Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6 Cursors k / n / l / h, remote control .............................................7 ■ D Decode Type, sound field parameter .............53 Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................49 Decoder parameter .........................................54 Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter .............51 Dimension, decoder parameter .......................54 Dimer, Display, Function Setup .....................60 Direct number access, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................39 Direct number access, XM Satellite Radio ....35 Direct, sound field parameter .........................53 Disconnect, Option menu ...............................50 DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7 Displaying HD Radio information .................33 Displaying input signal information ..............25 Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio information ................................................42 Displaying XM Satellite Radio information ................................................37 DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5 Drama, sound field program ..........................27 DSP Level, sound field parameter .................51 DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................61 Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................58 ■ E Editing sound field program ..........................51 Editing surround decoder ...............................51 Effect Level, sound field parameter ...............54 ENTER, remote control ...................................7 EQ Type Select, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................................58 Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......58 Extended Surround, Option menu ..................49 External amplifier connection ........................17 External component operation key , remote control .............................................7 External decoder connection ..........................16 Extra Speaker Assignment, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................................57 ■ F FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...................65 Firmware update ............................................65 FM antenna connection ..................................18 FM tuning .......................................................30 FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h), front panel ...................................................4 Frequency tuning ............................................30 Front left speaker ...........................................10 Front panel ....................................................... 4 Front panel display .......................................... 6 Front Panel Display Scroll, Display, Function Setup .......................................... 60 Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4 Front right speaker ......................................... 10 Front Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Function Setup, Setup menu .......................... 59 ■ G GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 58 GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ......... 60 ■ H Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 27 Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 27 HD indicator, front panel display .................... 6 HD Radio ....................................................... 32 HD Radio key, remote control ......................... 7 HD Radio reception, troubleshooting ............ 70 HDMI Auto Lipsync, Lipsync, Sound Setup .............................................. 59 HDMI control ................................................ 47 HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 59 HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6 HDMI information ......................................... 82 HDMI jack ..................................................... 13 HDMI OUT/HDMI IN 1-4 jack, rear panel ..... 5 HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4 HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 59 HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 70 Headphones, use ............................................ 25 Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 24 High frequency sound adjustment ................. 24 ■ I INFO, front panel ............................................ 4 INFO, remote control ...................................... 7 INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 65 Initial Delay, sound field parameter .............. 52 Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 60 Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 61 Input selection key, remote control ................. 7 INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4 Input signal information display .................... 25 Input source registration, SCENE function ... 24 Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9 iPod playback ................................................ 43 iPod universal dock connection ..................... 17 iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 74 iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ............................ 32 iTunes Tagging, troubleshooting ................... 71 ■ L LFE / Bass Out, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 59 Liveness, sound field parameter .................... 52 ■ M MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4 MAIN/ZONE2, remote control ....................... 7 Manual Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ........... 59 Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 56 Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 60 Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 61 MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4 MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 65 MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5 Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 27 Movie, sound field program .......................... 26 MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5 Multi information display, front panel display ...................................... 6 Multi-format player connection ..................... 16 Multi-zone configuration ............................... 62 Index Music Video, sound field program .................27 MUTE indicator, front panel display ...............6 MUTE, remote control .....................................7 ■ N ■ O ■ P ■ U Updating firmware ........................................ 65 USB port, front panel ...................................... 4 USB storage device connection ..................... 18 USB storage device playback ........................ 46 USB, troubleshooting .................................... 75 ■ V VER, advanced setup .................................... 65 VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ........ 4 VIDEO jack ................................................... 13 Video jack ..................................................... 13 Video Out, Option menu ............................... 50 Video/audio jack ........................................... 13 Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 29 VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7 VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4 VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6 Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 48 Volume, Function Setup ................................ 60 ■ X XM indicator, front panel display ................... 6 XM jack, rear panel ......................................... 5 XM Satellite Radio tuning ............................. 34 XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ............. 71 ■ APPENDIX R Y YPAO ............................................................ 20 YPAO, troubleshooting ................................. 76 ■ Z ZONE2 CONTROL, front panel ..................... 4 ZONE2 indicator, front panel display ............. 6 Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone2, Function Setup .......................................... 61 Zone2 Max Volume, Zone2, Function Setup .......................................... 61 ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4 ZONE2 OUT jack, rear panel ......................... 5 Zone2, Function Setup .................................. 61 “KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “pPOWER” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to “Part names and functions” on page 4. 85 En English Rear panel .........................................................5 Receiving remote control signal .....................17 Registering input source, SCENE function ....24 Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel ......................................................40 Registering sound field program, SCENE function ......................................................24 Registering XM Satellite Radio channel ........36 Remote control .................................................7 Remote control code resetting ........................64 Remote control code setting ...........................64 Remote control ID setting ..............................65 Remote control signal transmitter, remote control .............................................7 Remote control, controlling other component .....................64 Remote control, preparation .............................9 Remote control, troubleshooting ....................74 Remote control, use ..........................................9 REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................65 REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5 Repeat playback, iPod ....................................44 Repeat playback, USB storage device ...........46 Repeat, Option menu ......................................50 Resetting remote control code ........................64 Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ...............59 T TAG indicator, front panel display ................. 6 Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..... 58 The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 27 The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ....... 27 Tone control .................................................. 24 TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4 TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7 Transmitting remote control signal ............... 17 TRIGGER OUT jack, rear panel ..................... 5 Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting ................. 70 Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6 Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7 Tuning, AM ................................................... 30 Tuning, FM .................................................... 30 TUNING/CH l / h, front panel ................ 4 Turning off .................................................... 19 Turning on ..................................................... 19 TV control key, remote control ....................... 7 TV monitor connection ................................. 14 ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ■ S SCENE function ............................................ 23 SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 65 SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4 SCENE, remote control ................................... 7 Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 26 Selecting a source on GUI screen .................. 24 Selecting SCENE ........................................... 23 Setting Parental Lock, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 41 Setting remote control code ........................... 64 Setting remote control ID .............................. 65 Setup menu .................................................... 55 Setup menu basic operation ........................... 56 Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 44 Shuffle playback, USB storage device .......... 46 Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 50 Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 49 SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 29 SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6 SIRIUS jack, rear panel ................................... 5 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 38 SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ....... 73 SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6 Sleep timer ..................................................... 47 SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7 Sound field parameter .................................... 51 Sound field program editing .......................... 51 Sound field program registration, SCENE function ....................................... 24 Sound selection keys, remote control .............. 7 Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 58 SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7 SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 65 Speaker cable connection .............................. 12 Speaker Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 56 Speaker connection ........................................ 11 Speaker Distance, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6 Speaker layout ............................................... 10 Speaker Level, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 Speaker placement ......................................... 10 Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 56 SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5 Specifications ................................................. 83 Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 26 Sports, sound field program ........................... 27 SR PIN, advanced setup ................................ 65 Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 59 Staright decode mode .................................... 29 Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 28 STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4 Subwoofer ...................................................... 10 Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 Sur. Back Initial Delay, sound field parameter ................................ 52 Sur. Back Liveness, sound field parameter ... 52 Sur. Back Room Size, sound field parameter ................................ 52 Sur. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ....... 52 Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ............. 52 Sur. Room Size, sound field parameter ......... 52 Surround back left speaker ............................ 10 Surround Back Level, sound field parameter ................................ 53 Surround back right speaker .......................... 10 Surround back speaker ................................... 10 Surround Back Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Surround decoder editing ............................... 51 BASIC OPERATION P. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ...........52 P. Liveness, sound field parameter ................52 P. Room Size, sound field parameter .............52 Pairing Bluetooth components .......................45 Pairing, Option menu .....................................50 Panorama, decoder parameter ........................54 Parental Lock, Option menu ..........................49 PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4 PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5 Placing speaker ...............................................10 PLII Game, decoder .......................................28 PLII Movie, decoder ......................................28 PLII Music, decoder .......................................28 PLIIx Game, decoder .....................................28 PLIIx Movie, decoder ....................................28 PLIIx Music, decoder .....................................28 Power cable connection ..................................19 Power cable, rear panel ....................................5 POWER, remote control ..................................7 PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5 Presence L Level, sound field parameter .......53 Presence left speaker ......................................11 Presence R Level, sound field parameter .......53 Presence right speaker ....................................11 PRESET l / h, front panel .........................4 Preset Search mode, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................40 Preset Search mode, XM Satellite Radio .......36 Preset tuning ...................................................30 Pro Logic, decoder .........................................28 PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4 Projector connection .......................................14 PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4 ■ PREPARATION ON SCREEN, remote control ..........................7 OPTICAL jack ...............................................13 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4 Option menu ...................................................48 OPTION, remote control ..................................7 Surround L Level, sound field parameter ...... 53 Surround left speaker .................................... 10 Surround R Level, sound field parameter ..... 53 Surround right speaker .................................. 10 Surround Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 INTRODUCTION Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ..................................28 Neo:6 Music, decoder ....................................28 Neural Sur., decoder .......................................28 Numeric key, remote control ............................7 RETURN, remote control ................................ 7 Reverb Delay, sound field parameter ............ 53 Reverb Level, sound field parameter ............. 53 Reverb Time, sound field parameter ............. 53 Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 27 Room Size, sound field parameter ................. 52 List of remote control codes TV A.R. Systems Acme Acura ADC Admiral 0274 0260 0261, 0273 0259 0100, 0224, 0257, 0258, 0259, 0264, 0265 Advent 0204 Adventura 0107 Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328 Agashi 0327, 0328 Agazi 0259 Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Aim 0274 Aiwa 0028, 0297 Akai 0063, 0096, 0101, 0205, 0231, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Akiba 0262, 0274 Akura 0259, 0262, 0273, 0274 Alaron 0327 Alba 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0266, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0294, 0300, 0327 Albatron 0222 Alcyon 0249 Alleron 0105 Allorgan 0328 Allstar 0268, 0274 America Action 0225 AMOi 0326 Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275, 0328 Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273, 0274 Amtron 0104 Anam 0225, 0261 Anam National 0102, 0104 Anglo 0261, 0273 Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261, 0263, 0273, 0274 AOC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Apex 0061, 0117, 0139 Arcam 0327, 0328 Arcam Delta 0260 Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274 Arthur Martin 0275 ASA 0257, 0265 Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274 Astra 0261 Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Atori 0261, 0273 Auchan 0275 Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328 Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225 i Ausind Autovox Aventura Awa Axion Baird Bang & Olufsen Basic Line Bastide Baur Bazin Beko Belcor Bell & Howell Benq Beon Best Bestar Binatone Blue Sky Blue Star Boots BPL Bradford Brandt Brillian Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Bruns BTC Bush Candle Capsonic Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Centurion Century CGE Changhong Chimei Cimline Citizen City Clarion Clarivox 0249 0249, 0257, 0259, 0260, 0328 0097 0327, 0328 0206 0328 0230, 0257 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0328 0271, 0274 0328 0243, 0269, 0274, 0282, 0351, 0357, 0372, 0380 0090 0065, 0100 0051, 0160, 0315 0268, 0271, 0274 0243 0243, 0268, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0274 0270 0260, 0328 0270, 0274 0104, 0225 0267, 0272 0228 0274 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0090 0063, 0225 0257 0262 0261, 0262, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0286, 0294, 0300, 0328, 0329, 0351, 0388, 0394, 0413 0072, 0090, 0096, 0107 0259 0274 0096 0266 0088 0261, 0273, 0274 0317 0268, 0271, 0274 0229, 0328 0057, 0101 0117 0268, 0271, 0274 0257 0243, 0249 0117 0323 0261, 0273 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0104 0261, 0273 0225 0271 Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0328 CMS 0327 CMS Hightec 0328 Coby 0151 Colortyme 0072, 0090 Commercial Solutions 0071 Concerto 0072, 0090 Concorde 0261, 0273 Condor 0243, 0260, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0327 Contec 0225, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0273, 0327 Contec/Cony 0094, 0104 Continental Edison 0267 Cosmel 0261, 0273 Craig 0104, 0225 Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249, 0257 Crown 0104, 0225, 0243, 0249, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274 CS Electronics 0260, 0262, 0327 CTC Clatronic 0263 CTX 0159 Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0099, 0224 CXC 0104, 0225 Cybertron 0262 Cytron 0202 Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103, 0119, 0245, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0281, 0285, 0303, 0321, 0327, 0328, 0344, 0361, 0387 Dainichi 0262, 0327 Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Dantax 0243, 0271 Dawa 0274 Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090, 0261, 0273 De Graaf 0264 Decca 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Dell 0167, 0195 Denver 0308, 0312 Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274 Diamant 0274 Diamond 0327 DiamondVision 0213, 0221 Dimensia 0099 Disney 0137 Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Dream Vision 0415, 0416 DTS 0261, 0273 Dual 0260, 0274, 0328 Dual-Tec 0260, 0261 Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0328 Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133, 0225 Dux 0271 Dwin 0224 Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274 Dynex 0181, 0182 Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274, 0328 Elcit 0257 Electa 0270 ELECTRO TECH 0261 Electroband 0057, 0101 Electrograph 0226 Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101, 0102 Element 0180 Elin 0260, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327 Elite 0262, 0268, 0274 Elman 0263 Elta 0261, 0273, 0327 Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077, 0082, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0095, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0119, 0225, 0243, 0257, 0274 Emprex 0200 Envision 0072, 0090, 0096 Epson 0156, 0201, 0309 Erres 0268, 0271, 0274 ESA 0097 ESC 0328 Etron 0261 Eurofeel 0328 Euro-Feel 0259 Euroline 0271 Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328 Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268, 0274 Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268, 0274, 0327, 0328 Expert 0275 Exquisit 0274 Fenner 0261, 0273 Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272 Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274, 0327 Filsai 0328 Finlandia 0264 Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268 Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257, 0260, 0266, 0269, 0328 Flint 0268, 0274 Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258, 0260, 0271, 0327 Formenti/Phoenix 0327 Fortress 0257, 0258 Fraba 0243, 0274 Friac 0243 Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264, 0265, 0273, 0328 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0105, 0328 Fujitsu General 0328 Fujitsu Siemens 0425, 0426, 0427, 0428, 0429 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0225, 0259 Futuretech 0104, 0225 Galaxi 0269, 0274 Galaxis 0243, 0274 Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227 GBC 0261, 0266, 0273 GE 0069, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0106, 0112, 0131 Geant Casino 0275 GEC 0260, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273 General Technic 0261, 0273 Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268, 0274 GFM 0177, 0210 Giant 0328 Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096, 0108 GoldHand 0327 Goldline 0274 GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0322, 0328, 0395, 0399, 0412 Gorenje 0243, 0269 GPM 0262 GPX 0211 Gradiente 0162 Graetz 0265 Granada 0249, 0260, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270, 0271 Gronic 0328 Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249, 0274, 0356 Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225 Haier 0187, 0207 Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327, 0328 Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090 Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328 Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274 Hantor 0274 Harman/Kardon 0088 Harvard 0104, 0225 Harwood 0273, 0274 Havermy 0224 HCM 0259, 0260, 0261, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hema 0273, 0328 Hewlett Packard 0146 Higashi 0327 HiLine 0274 Hinari Hisawa Hisense Hitachi Hornyphon Hoshai Huanyu Hygashi Hyper Hypson Hyundai Iberia ICE ICeS Ilo IMA Imperial Indiana Infinity InFocus Ingelen Ingersol Initial Inno Hit Innovation Insignia Inteq Interactive Interbuy Interfunk International Intervision Irradio Isukai ITC ITS ITT ITV Janeil JBL JC Penney JCB Jensen JVC 0261, 0262, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0270, 0275 0165 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0072, 0090, 0094, 0173, 0254, 0255, 0256, 0260, 0264, 0265, 0266, 0274, 0285, 0300, 0319, 0328, 0348, 0349, 0385, 0402, 0410 0268, 0274 0262 0260, 0327 0260, 0327, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0327, 0328 0259, 0260, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 0223 0274 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0327 0198, 0203 0104 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0274 0268, 0271, 0274 0088 0168, 0277, 0313, 0397, 0430 0265 0261, 0273 0203 0249, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0182, 0188, 0190, 0209 0076 0243 0261, 0273 0243, 0257, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274 0327 0243, 0259, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0328 0249, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0268, 0270, 0274, 0327 0261, 0265 0261, 0271, 0274 0107 0088 0072, 0073, 0085, 0090, 0099, 0103, 0106 0057, 0101 0072, 0090 0017, 0018, 0019, 0092, 0093, 0094, 0106, 0251, 0252, 0266, 0268, 0293, 0360, 0379 Kaisui Kamosonic Kamp Kapsch Karcher Kawasho KEC Kendo Kenwood KIC Kingsley KLH Kloss Novabeam Kneissel Kolster Konka Korpel Korting Kosmos Koyoda KTV Kyoto Lasat Lenco Lenoir Leyco LG LG/GoldStar Liesenk Liesenkotter Life Lifetec Lloyds Loewe Loewe Opta Logik Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxman Luxor LXI M Electronic MAG Magnadyne Magnafon 0260, 0261, 0262, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0260 0260, 0327 0265 0243, 0260, 0261, 0271, 0274 0072, 0090, 0101, 0327 0225 0243, 0263, 0264, 0274 0072, 0090, 0096 0328 0260, 0327 0117 0104, 0107 0243, 0250, 0274 0268, 0274 0262 0268, 0271, 0274 0243, 0257 0274 0261 0085, 0096, 0104, 0225, 0229, 0260, 0328 0327, 0328 0243 0261, 0273 0260, 0261, 0273 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274 0016, 0038, 0039, 0077, 0103, 0145, 0222, 0243, 0246, 0253, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0290, 0299, 0316, 0327, 0328, 0351, 0359, 0367, 0382, 0384, 0389, 0396 0246 0271 0274 0259, 0261 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 0273 0243, 0250, 0274, 0280, 0306, 0347 0257, 0268, 0271 0100 0264, 0271, 0273, 0274 0264, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268 0072, 0090 0260, 0264, 0328 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0099 0260, 0261, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271 0050 0257, 0263, 0271 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0098, 0114, 0115, 0129, 0134, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210 Magnum 0259, 0261 Majestic 0100 Mandor 0259 Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0158, 0268, 0271, 0274 Marelli 0257 Mark 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Masuda 0328 Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328, 0405 Matsushita 0067 Maxent 0193, 0226 Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274 Medion 0259, 0261, 0274 Megapower 0222 Megatron 0072, 0077 MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Melvox 0275 Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077, 0100, 0103, 0133, 0219, 0261, 0273 Memphis 0261, 0273 Mercury 0273, 0274 Metz 0257 MGA 0072, 0077, 0090, 0096, 0103 Micromaxx 0259, 0261 Microstar 0259, 0261 Midland 0069, 0071, 0073, 0076, 0085, 0106, 0108 Minerva 0249 Minoka 0268, 0274 Mintek 0203 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103, 0196, 0224, 0257, 0266, 0268, 0274, 0298, 0371 Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250, 0260, 0327, 0328 Monivision 0222 Montgomery Ward 0100 Motion 0249 Motorola 0102, 0224 MTC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0327 Multi System 0271 Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0264, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Murphy 0260, 0327 NAD 0061, 0072, 0077 Naonis 0264 NEC 0026, 0053, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0266, 0328 ii Neckermann NEI Net-TV Neufunk New Tech New World NewTech Nicamagic Nikkai Nikko Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Nordvision Novatronic Oceanic Okano Olevia ONCEAS Onwa Opera Oppo Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orion Orline Osaki Oso Otto Versand Pael Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Panavision Pathe Cinema Pausa Penney Perdio Perfekt Philco Philharmonic Philips iii 0243, 0257, 0260, 0264, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268, 0271, 0274 0226 0273, 0274 0261, 0268 0262 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0259, 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0072, 0077, 0096 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 0265 0155 0328 0257, 0265, 0267, 0268 0271 0274 0265, 0275 0243, 0269, 0274 0052, 0140, 0149, 0154, 0157 0260 0104, 0225 0274 0208 0065, 0067 0194 0224 0268, 0274 0121, 0192, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0329 0274 0259, 0260, 0262, 0274, 0328 0262 0258, 0260, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0243, 0260, 0269, 0274, 0328 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0006, 0007, 0066, 0067, 0068, 0069, 0070, 0102, 0106, 0113, 0147, 0215, 0241, 0265, 0274, 0279, 0310, 0332, 0334, 0368, 0374 0274 0243, 0250, 0260, 0275, 0327 0261, 0273 0061, 0069, 0071, 0077, 0096 0274, 0327 0274 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0243, 0249, 0257, 0274 0260, 0328 0040, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0098, 0099, 0102, 0114, 0135, 0143, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210, 0212, 0232, 0233, 0257, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0278, 0287, 0301, 0302, 0307, 0311, 0314, 0330, 0331, 0333, 0337, 0338, 0339, 0341, 0343, 0345, 0355, 0363, 0365, 0377, 0378, 0381, 0383, 0406, 0409, 0414 Philips Magnavox 0089, 0114, 0115 Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072, 0090, 0243, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0408 Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273, 0274 Playsonic 0328 Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184, 0220 Poppy 0261, 0273 Portland 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103 Prandoni-Prince 0249, 0264 Precision 0260, 0328 Prima 0161, 0207, 0261, 0265, 0273 Princeton 0222 Prism 0069, 0106 Profex 0261, 0273 Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274 Proline 0268, 0274 Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099 Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Protech 0259, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0328 Proton 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094 Protron 0150 PROVIEW 0050, 0164 Provision 0271, 0274 Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108 Pye 0268, 0271, 0274, 0296, 0338 Pymi 0261, 0273 Quandra Vision 0275 Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102, 0106 Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Questa 0266 Radialva 0274 RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077, 0096, 0225, 0274 RadioShack/Realistic 0072, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0099, 0104 Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Radiomarelli 0257, 0274 Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273, 0274 Rank 0266 RCA Realistic Recor Redstar Reflex Revox Rex RFT Rhapsody R-Line Roadstar Robotron Rowa Royal Lux RTF Runco Saba Saisho Salora Sambers Sampo Samsung Sandra Sansui Sanyo SBR Sceptre Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scotch Scott Sears SEG SEI 0071, 0072, 0073, 0074, 0075, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0103, 0109, 0120, 0179, 0218 0065, 0077, 0096, 0225 0274 0274 0274 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0264, 0265 0243, 0250, 0257 0327 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273 0257 0327, 0328 0243 0257 0076, 0096, 0108 0257, 0265, 0267, 0272, 0376 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0264, 0265 0249, 0263 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0226 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0072, 0077, 0084, 0085, 0086, 0087, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0118, 0217, 0229, 0235, 0236, 0237, 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0284, 0295, 0327, 0328, 0336, 0346, 0390, 0407 0260, 0327, 0328 0063, 0121, 0268, 0274 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0065, 0090, 0141, 0191, 0243, 0250, 0260, 0266, 0273, 0291, 0327, 0328, 0370, 0373, 0391 0271, 0274 0166, 0185 0265 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0287, 0300, 0328, 0364, 0366 0072, 0077 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094, 0104, 0105, 0199, 0225 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0097, 0099, 0105 0259, 0260, 0263, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0300, 0327, 0328 0274 SEI-Sinudyne Seleco Sencora Sentra Serino Sharp Sheng Chia Shogun Siarem Sierra Siesta Signature Silva Silver Singer Sinudyne Skantic Solavox Sonitron Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound & Vision Soundesign Soundwave Squareview SSS Standard Starlite Stenway Stern Strato Stylandia Sunkai Sunstar Sunwood Superla Superscan SuperTech Supra Supre-Macy Supreme Susumu Sutron SVA Sydney 0257, 0263, 0265 0264, 0265, 0266 0261, 0273 0273 0327 0009, 0010, 0011, 0072, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0110, 0148, 0183, 0216, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0258, 0266, 0288, 0304, 0324, 0325, 0340, 0358, 0362, 0369, 0386, 0392, 0398, 0400, 0401, 0403 0224 0090 0257, 0263, 0274 0268, 0274 0243 0100 0327 0266 0257, 0263, 0275 0257, 0263, 0271, 0274 0265 0265 0243, 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0265, 0275 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0041, 0057, 0058, 0059, 0060, 0101, 0116, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0142, 0169, 0170, 0171, 0172, 0174, 0234, 0261, 0266, 0276, 0289, 0292, 0393, 0411 0262, 0263 0072, 0077, 0090, 0104, 0105, 0225 0268, 0271, 0274 0097 0090, 0104, 0225 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0104, 0225, 0271, 0273, 0274 0270 0264, 0265 0273, 0274 0328 0261 0273, 0274 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0095, 0224 0273, 0274, 0327 0261, 0273 0107 0057, 0101 0262 0261, 0273 0197 0260, 0327, 0328 Sylvania Symphonic Syntax Syntax-Brillian Sysline Sytong Tandy Tashiko Tatung TCM Teac Tec Technics TechniSat Techwood TEDELEX Teknika Teleavia Telecor Telefunken Telegazi Telemeister Telesonic Telestar Teletech Teleton Televideon Televiso Tensai Tesmet Tevion Texet Thomson Thorn TMK TNCi Tokai Tokyo Tomashi Toshiba Totevision Towada Trakton Trans Continens Transtec Trident 0072, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0097, 0098, 0175, 0177, 0210 0097, 0104, 0108, 0133, 0210, 0225 0149 0149 0271 0327 0224, 0258, 0260, 0262, 0265, 0328 0260, 0264, 0266, 0327, 0328 0102, 0227, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0274, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0067, 0069, 0106 0320, 0417, 0418, 0419 0069, 0072, 0090, 0106 0328 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0094, 0100, 0103, 0104, 0105, 0225 0267 0274, 0328 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274 0274 0274 0274 0274 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 0260, 0328 0327 0275 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0268 0259, 0261 0260, 0273, 0327, 0328 0238, 0239, 0240, 0260, 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274, 0335 0271, 0274 0072, 0077, 0090 0076 0268, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0270 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0061, 0062, 0063, 0064, 0065, 0122, 0123, 0124, 0128, 0130, 0132, 0139, 0214, 0244, 0266, 0283, 0305, 0328, 0329, 0342, 0350, 0352, 0353, 0354, 0375, 0404 0085 0265, 0328 0328 0274, 0328 0327 0328 Triumph Uher 0274 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0274 Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0327 Unic Line 0274 United 0271 Universum 0243, 0249, 0259, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Univox 0274 Vector Research 0096 Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 Victor 0093, 0266, 0268 VIDEOLOGIC 0327 Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 VideoSystem 0268, 0274 Videotechnic 0327, 0328 Vidikron 0088 Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103 Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226, 0318 Viking 0107 Viore 0198 Visiola 0260, 0327 Vision 0268, 0274, 0328 Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160, 0227, 0420, 0421, 0422, 0423, 0424 Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274 Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264, 0265, 0268, 0274 Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328 Wards 0072, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0096, 0098, 0099, 0100, 0103, 0105 Watson 0268, 0271, 0274 Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327 Waycon 0061 Wega 0257, 0266, 0274 Wegavox 0273 Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142 White Westinghouse 0008, 0119, 0260, 0263, 0271, 0274, 0327 Wincom 0055, 0056 Xrypton 0274 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Yamishi 0274, 0328 Yokan 0274 Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Yorx 0262 Zanussi 0264, 0328 Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078, 0079, 0090, 0100, 0108, 0111 VCR ABS 1066 Adventura Adyson Aiwa 1023 1090 1023, 1072, 1073, 1074 Akai 1071, 1073 Akiba 1079, 1090 Akura 1073, 1079, 1090 Alba 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Alienware 1066 Ambassador 1076 American High 1022 Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091 Anitech 1079, 1090 Apex 1010 ASA 1077, 1078 Asha 1020 Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090 Audio Dynamics 1018 Audiosonic 1091 Audiovox 1021 Baird 1072, 1073, 1075, 1091 Bang & Olufsen 1067 Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Baur 1078 Beaumark 1020 Bell & Howell 1019 Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091 Black Panther Line 1075, 1091 Blaupunkt 1078 Bondstec 1076, 1090 Broksonic 1054 Bush 1074, 1075, 1079, 1090, 1091, 1097, 1099, 1109, 1139 Calix 1021 Candle 1020, 1021 Canon 1022 Cathay 1091 Catron 1076 CGE 1072, 1073 Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090 CineVision 1058 Citizen 1020, 1021 Clatronic 1076, 1090 Colortyme 1018 Condor 1075, 1076, 1091 Craig 1020, 1021 Crown 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022 Cybernex 1020 CyberPower 1066 Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076, 1091, 1116, 1141 Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091 Dantax 1074 Daytron 1075, 1091 DBX 1018 De Graaf 1078 Decca 1072, 1073, 1078 Dell 1066 Denko 1090 DiamondVision 1050 DigiFusion 1092 DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1065 Dish Network 1064 Dishpro 1064 Dual 1073, 1078, 1091 Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Echostar Elbe Elcatech Electrohome Electrophonic Elsay Elta Emerson 1072, 1078 1032 1023 1064 1091 1090 1021 1021 1090 1079, 1090, 1091 1021, 1022, 1023, 1070, 1090 ESC 1075, 1091 Etzuko 1079, 1090 Expressvu 1064 Ferguson 1073 Fidelity 1072, 1090 Finlandia 1078 Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078 Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079, 1090 Fisher 1019 Flint 1074 Formenti/Phoenix 1078 Frontech 1076 Fuji 1022 Fujitsu 1072 Funai 1023, 1072 Galaxy 1072 Garrard 1023 Gateway 1066 GBC 1076, 1079 GE 1020, 1022 GEC 1078 Geloso 1079 General 1076 General Technic 1074 GOI 1064 GoldHand 1079, 1090 Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072, 1077 Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Gradiente 1023 Graetz 1073 Granada 1078 Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Grundig 1078, 1079 Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091 Harley Davidson 1023 Harman/Kardon 1018 Harwood 1090 HCM 1079, 1090 Headquarter 1019 Hewlett Packard 1066 Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 Hisawa 1074 Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078, 1089, 1108, 1124 HNS 1060 Howard Computers 1066 HP 1066 HTS 1064 Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061 Hughes Network Systems 1038, 1060 Humax 1035, 1060, 1094 Hush 1066 Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 iv iBUYPOWER Impego Imperial Inno Hit 1066 1076 1072 1075, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Innovation 1074 Instant Replay 1022 Interbuy 1077, 1090 Interfunk 1078 Intervision 1072, 1091 Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090 ITT 1073 ITV 1075, 1077, 1091 JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022 JCL 1022 JVC 1011, 1012, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1028, 1035, 1064, 1073, 1085, 1117, 1130, 1131, 1133, 1134, 1135, 1136 Kaisui 1079, 1090 Karcher 1078 Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076, 1090 Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073 Kodak 1021, 1022 Korpel 1079, 1090 Kyoto 1090 Lenco 1075 Leyco 1079, 1090 LG 1021, 1053, 1072, 1077, 1088, 1100, 1106, 1125, 1143 Lifetec 1074 Linksys 1066 Lloyd’s 1023 Loewe Opta 1077, 1078 Logik 1079, 1090 Lumatron 1075, 1091 Luxor 1090 LXI 1021 M Electronic 1072 Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044, 1070 Magnin 1021 Manesth 1079, 1090 Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022, 1078 Mark 1091 Marta 1021 Matsui 1074, 1077 Matsushita 1022 Media Center PC 1066 Mediator 1078 Medion 1074 MEI 1022 Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1032, 1048, 1069, 1072, 1077 Memphis 1079, 1090 MGN Technology 1020 Micromaxx 1074 Microsoft 1066 Microstar 1074 Migros 1072 Mind 1066 Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078 Motorola 1022 MTC 1020 v Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090 Murphy 1072 NEC 1018, 1019, 1073 Neckermann 1073, 1078 NEI 1078 Nesco 1079, 1090 Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091 Nikko 1021 Niveus Media 1066 Noblex 1020 Nokia 1073, 1091 Nordmende 1073 Northgate 1066 Oceanic 1072, 1073 Okano 1074, 1090, 1091 Olympus 1022 Optimus 1021 Orion 1033, 1069, 1074, 1097, 1139 Orson 1072 Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Otto Versand 1078 Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079, 1090 Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009, 1022, 1026, 1042, 1043, 1068, 1082, 1101, 1126, 1132 Pathe Marconi 1073 Perdio 1072 Philco 1022, 1090 Philips 1022, 1030, 1035, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1044, 1055, 1060, 1078, 1084, 1095, 1096, 1104, 1105, 1111, 1113, 1122, 1124, 1127, 1128, 1129 Philips Magnavox 1030 Phonola 1078 Pilot 1021 Pioneer 1078, 1118 Polaroid 1010, 1049 Portland 1075, 1076, 1091 Prinz 1072 Profex 1079 Proline 1072 Proscan 1065 Prosonic 1074, 1091 Pulsar 1032 Pye 1052, 1078 Quarter 1019 Quartz 1019 Quasar 1022 Quelle 1072, 1078 Radialva 1090 RadioShack 1021 RadioShack/Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Radiola 1078 Radix 1021 Randex 1021 RCA 1020, 1022, 1025, 1035, 1040, 1047, 1060, 1065 Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 ReplayTV 1041, 1068 Rex 1073 RFT 1076, 1078, 1090 Ricavision Roadstar 1066 1075, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Royal 1090 Runco 1032 Saba 1073 Saisho 1074, 1079 Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038, 1040, 1046, 1060, 1080, 1107, 1110, 1112, 1121, 1123, 1140, 1142 Samurai 1076, 1090 Sanky 1032 Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069, 1073 Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114 Saville 1091 SBR 1078 Schaub Lorenz 1072, 1073 Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Sears 1019, 1021, 1022 SEG 1079, 1090, 1091 SEI-Sinudyne 1078 Seleco 1073 Sentra 1076, 1090 Sentron 1079, 1090 Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057, 1081, 1115, 1137 Shintom 1079, 1090 Shivaki 1077 Shogun 1020 Siemens 1077 Silva 1077 Silver 1091 Singer 1022 Sinudyne 1078 Solavox 1076 Sonic Blue 1041, 1068 Sonneclair 1090 Sonoko 1075, 1091 Sontec 1077 Sony 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1024, 1027, 1036, 1062, 1066, 1083, 1098, 1103, 1138 Stack 1066 Stack 9 1066 Standard 1075, 1091 Stern 1091 STS 1022 Sunkai 1074 Sunstar 1072 Suntronic 1072 Sunwood 1079, 1090 Superscan 1070 Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044, 1052, 1070 Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090 Systemax 1066 Tagar Systems 1066 Taisho 1074 Tandberg 1091 Tandy 1019 Tashiko 1021, 1072 Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078 TCM 1074, 1093, 1120 Teac 1023, 1091 Tec 1076, 1090, 1091 Technics 1022 Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023 Teleavia 1073 Telefunken Teletech Tenosal Tensai 1073 1090, 1091 1079, 1090 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Tevion 1074 Thomson 1073, 1087 Thorn 1073 Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037, 1039, 1040, 1060, 1061, 1062 TMK 1020 Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090 Tonsai 1079 Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034, 1051, 1063, 1066, 1073, 1078, 1086, 1099, 1102, 1119, 1144 Totevision 1020, 1021 Touch 1066 Towada 1079, 1090 Towika 1079, 1090 TVA 1076 Uher 1077 UltimateTV 1065 Ultravox 1091 Unitech 1020 United Quick Star 1075, 1091 Universum 1072, 1077, 1078 Vector Research 1018 Video Concepts 1018 Videon 1074 Videosonic 1020 Viewsonic 1066 Voodoo 1066 Wards 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Weltblick 1077 XR-1000 1022, 1023 Yamaha 1018, 1019 Yamishi 1079, 1090 Yokan 1079, 1090 Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090 Zenith 1032 ZT Group 1066 DVD 4Kus Accurian Advent AEG Airis Aiwa Akai 2097 2220 2169, 2201 2312 2318 2272 2170, 2195, 2225, 2227 Akura 2310 Alba 2018, 2232, 2247, 2259, 2264 Alco 2199 Alize 2315 Allegro 2215 Amitech 2312 Amphion MediaWorks 2145 AMW 2145, 2313 Apex 2044, 2045, 2046, 2047, 2076, 2208, 2209 Apple 2163 Arrgo 2216 Asono 2318 Aspire 2140, 2202 Astar 2162 ATACOM Audiovox Avious Awa Axion Bang & Olufsen Baze BBK Bellagio Best Buy Blaupunkt Blue Parade Boghe Brainwave Brandt Broksonic Bush 2318 2111, 2199 2317 2313 2171 2210 2317 2318 2313 2309 2209 2207 2300 2312 2198, 2238 2192, 2195 2018, 2060, 2248, 2264, 2301, 2308, 2317, 2350, 2368 California Audio Labs 2197 Cambridge Audio 2304 CAT 2306, 2307 CAVS 2146 Centrum 2307 CGV 2304, 2312 Changhong 2222 Cinetec 2313 CineVision 2191, 2215 Clatronic 2308, 2317 Coby 2077, 2124, 2314 Conia 2301 Continental Edison 2313 Crown 2312 C-Tech 2305 Curtis Mathes 2217 CVG 2299 CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216, 2233, 2258 Cytron 2166 Daenyx 2313 Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280, 2299, 2312, 2313, 2326, 2376 Daewoo International 2313 Dalton 2311 Dansai 2303, 2312 Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313 Dayton 2313 DEC 2308 Decca 2312 Denon 2105, 2147, 2197, 2286 Denver 2288, 2308, 2310, 2314 Denzel 2302 Desay 2159 Diamond 2304, 2305 DiamondVision 2179, 2186 Disney 2078, 2088 DK Digital 2257 Dmtech 2226 Dual 2302 Durabrand 2218 DVX 2305 Easy Home 2309 Eclipse 2304 E-Dem 2318 Electrohome 2312 Elin 2312 Elta 2263, 2312, 2315 Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219 Enterprise 2211 Enzer Epson ESA Finlux Fintec Fisher Funai Gateway GE Gericom GFM Giec Global Solutions Global Sphere Go Video Goodmans 2302 2165 2219 2304, 2312, 2317 2299 2212 2219 2097 2079, 2206, 2209 2269 2176 2300 2305 2305 2135, 2215 2247, 2289, 2298, 2300, 2308, 2330, 2369 GPX 2177 Gradiente 2197 Graetz 2302 Greenhill 2209 Grundig 2271 Grunkel 2312, 2316 GVG 2299 H&B 2308 H_her 2318 Haaz 2304, 2305 Haier 2172 Harman/Kardon 2125, 2213 HiMAX 2309 Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108, 2302, 2309, 2320, 2366 Hiteker 2208 Home Tech Industries 2318 Hyundai 2316 Ilo 2167 Initial 2167, 2209 Innovation 2228 Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219 Integra 2207 Irradio 2103 iSymphony 2164 JBL 2213 JVC 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2053, 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057, 2070, 2242, 2261, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2278, 2339, 2340, 2341, 2342, 2386, 2387, 2389, 2390, 2391 Jwin 2148 Kansai 2314 Kawasaki 2199 Kennex 2312 Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270 KeyPlug 2312 Kiiro 2312 Kingavon 2308 Kiss 2302 KLH 2199, 2209 Koda 2308 Koss 2095, 2198, 2204 KXD 2309 Landel 2221 Lasonic 2214 Lawson 2305 Lecson 2303 Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317 Lenoxx 2203, 2218 LG Life Lifetec Limit Liquid Video Liteon Loewe LogicLab Magnavox Magnex Majestic Marantz Marquant Matsui McIntosh Mecotek Medion Memorex MiCO Micromaxx Microsoft Microstar Minoka Minowa Mintek Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka Mustek Mx Onda Mystral Naiko Nesa Neufunk Nevir Next Base Nexxtech NU-TEC Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orava Orbit Orion Oritron P&B Pacific Panasonic Parasound peeKTON Philips 2080, 2107, 2115, 2116, 2141, 2188, 2211, 2215, 2237, 2239, 2285, 2293, 2295, 2348, 2370 2228 2228 2305 2204 2097, 2121, 2220 2274 2305 2075, 2096, 2178, 2180, 2196, 2205, 2219, 2308 2317 2314 2282 2312 2198, 2296 2149 2312 2228 2078, 2184, 2195 2300, 2304 2228 2206 2228 2312 2317 2167, 2209 2081 2308, 2309 2302 2232 2304 2316 2312 2209 2302 2312 2221 2161 2301 2205, 2290 2097 2150, 2173 2303 2230 2308 2313 2027, 2060 2198, 2204 2308 2305 2015, 2016, 2017, 2036, 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2074, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112, 2120, 2131, 2132, 2197, 2205, 2244, 2245, 2246, 2253, 2254, 2255, 2292, 2321, 2324, 2327, 2328, 2329, 2331, 2383, 2388 2151 2318 2026, 2061, 2062, 2075, 2090, 2094, 2096, 2097, 2103, 2110, 2126, 2180, 2193, 2205, 2231, 2235, 2241, 2251, Phonotrend Pioneer Pointer Polaroid Portland Powerpoint Prima Proceed Proscan Prosonic Protron Provision Pye Qwestar Raite RCA RedStar Regent Reoc Rimax Rio Roadstar Ronin Rotel Rowa Rownsonic Saba Sabaki Saivod Sampo Samsung Sansui Sanyo ScanMagic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scientific Labs Scott Seeltech SEG Sharp Shinsonic Sigmatek Silva Singer Skymaster 2252, 2256, 2260, 2268, 2282, 2332, 2333, 2343, 2344, 2345, 2367, 2371, 2373, 2380, 2382, 2385 2317 2012, 2013, 2014, 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2113, 2134, 2207, 2230, 2236, 2265, 2266, 2267, 2297, 2322, 2351, 2352, 2353, 2354, 2355, 2356, 2357, 2358, 2359, 2377 2312 2047, 2133, 2185 2312 2313 2174 2208 2206 2299, 2314 2152 2308 2194 2198 2302 2058, 2059, 2071, 2079, 2183, 2199, 2206, 2207, 2209 2310, 2312, 2314 2203 2305 2315 2215 2281, 2308 2313 2153 2200, 2301 2307 2198, 2238 2305 2312 2223 2031, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2082, 2127, 2137, 2138, 2154, 2182, 2197, 2283, 2319, 2325, 2346, 2347, 2349, 2372, 2381 2027, 2195, 2304, 2305, 2312 2139, 2195, 2212, 2374 2232 2312 2226 2305 2243, 2311 2318 2240, 2302, 2305, 2313 2009, 2010, 2084, 2122, 2142, 2143, 2144, 2181, 2190, 2228, 2262, 2375 2167 2309, 2318 2310 2304, 2305 2279, 2305 vi Skyworth Slim Art SM Electronic Sonic Blue Sontech Sony 2310 2312 2305 2215 2316 2005, 2006, 2007, 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024, 2025, 2069, 2072, 2073, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2091, 2092, 2093, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130, 2249, 2250, 2323, 2334, 2335, 2336, 2360, 2361, 2362, 2363, 2364, 2365, 2384 Soundmaster 2305 Soundmax 2305 Spectra 2313 Spectroniq 2155 Standard 2305 Star Cluster 2305 Starmedia 2308, 2318 Sungale 2158 Sunkai 2312 Superscan 2196 Supervision 2305 Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189, 2196, 2219, 2224 Symphonic 2062, 2180 Synn 2305 T.D.E. Systems 2316 Tatung 2083, 2312 TCM 2228, 2379 Teac 2199, 2287, 2301, 2305 Tec 2310 Technics 2197 Technika 2312, 2317 Telefunken 2307 Tensai 2312 Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311 Theta Digital 2207 Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284, 2294 Tokai 2302, 2310 Top Suxess 2318 Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027, 2028, 2029, 2030, 2098, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119, 2136, 2187, 2195, 2205, 2291, 2337, 2338, 2378 TRANScontinents 2313, 2317 Transonic 2317 Trio 2312 Trutech 2160 TruVision 2309 TSM 2318 Umax 2315 United 2317 Urban Concepts 2205 US Logic 2167 Venturer 2199 Viewmaster 2318 Vocopro 2156 VocoStar 2157 Waitec 2318 Welltech 2300 Westinghouse 2109, 2168 Wharfedale 2304, 2305 vii Woxter Xbox Xlogic XMS Xoro Yamada Yamaha Yamakawa Yukai Zenith 2315, 2318 2206, 2229 2305, 2312 2312 2300 2097, 2313, 2315 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2011, 2018, 2019, 2036, 2106, 2197, 2273 2302, 2313 2232 2080, 2141, 2205, 2211, 2215 Blu-ray Disc LG Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Yamaha 2115 2089, 2131, 2132 2134 2035, 2127 2142, 2143, 2144 2025 2018 DVR Bush Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Samsung Yamaha 2060 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042 2061, 2062 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067 2059 2035 2036 DVD Recorder Aspire Astar Broksonic Go Video Hitachi Insignia Irradio JVC LG Liteon Panasonic Philips Pioneer Pye Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sony Sylvania Toshiba Yamaha 2140 2162 2192 2135 2108 2080 2103 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057 2107, 2115, 2141, 2188 2121 2037, 2038, 2039, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112 2090, 2096, 2097, 2126, 2193 2067, 2113 2194 2034, 2082, 2138 2027 2139 2022, 2023, 2024, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130 2189 2030, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119 2106 Cable ABC ADB Adelphia 3004, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3037, 3040, 3067, 3080, 3081 3070 3003 Alcatel 3066 Americast 3046 Amstrad 3048, 3068 Antronix 3019, 3020 Archer 3020 Arcon 3048 AT&T 3013 Axis 3048 Bell South 3046 Cable Vision 3014 Cabletenna 3019 Cabletime 3058 Cableview 3005 Clearmaster 3045 ClearMax 3045 Clyde Cablevision 3059 Colour Voice 3022 Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039 Comcrypt 3057 Comtronics 3023 Contec 3024 Coolmax 3045 COX 3006 Cryptovision 3060 Director 3006 Eastern 3025 Everquest 3041 Fidelity 3048 Filmnet 3057 Filmnet Cablecrypt 3061 Filmnet Comcrypt 3061 Finlux 3051 Focus 3044 Foxtel 3068 France Telecom 3054, 3055 Freebox 3069 GC Electronics 3020 GE 3015, 3016 GEC 3059 Gemini 3026, 3041 General Instrument 3006, 3008, 3016, 3039, 3050, 3067, 3075 Goldstar 3042 Gooding 3049 Grundig 3048, 3049 Hamlin 3027, 3028 Hirschmann 3051 Hitachi 3016 HomeChoice 3056 Humax 3001, 3002, 3071 ITT Nokia 3051 Jasco 3041 Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016, 3026, 3037, 3041, 3050, 3064, 3067, 3075 JVC 3049 Kabel Deutschland 3043, 3073, 3074 Macab 3055 Magnavox 3029 Maspro 3049 Matsui 3049 MegaCable 3039 Memorex 3030, 3040 Minerva 3049 Mnet 3057 Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010, 3013, 3039, 3072, 3075 Movie Time Mr Zapp Multichoice Multitech NEC NET Brazil Nokia Noos NSC Oak Pace Palladium Panasonic Paragon Philips 3031, 3063 3055 3057 3045 3018 3007 3051 3055 3031 3024 3011, 3043, 3084 3049 3034, 3036, 3040 3040 3021, 3022, 3029, 3049, 3053, 3054, 3055 Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038, 3042, 3048, 3083, 3084 Popular Mechanics 3044 Proscan 3015, 3016 Pulsar 3040 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 3064 Quasar 3040 RadioShack 3041, 3045 RCA 3005, 3036, 3076, 3077 Realistic 3020 Recoton 3044 Regal 3028 Regency 3025 Rembrandt 3016 Runco 3040 Sagem 3055 Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032, 3042 SAT 3048 Scientific Atlanta 3003, 3004, 3011, 3012, 3013, 3062, 3078, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3083, 3084 Signal 3026, 3041 Signature 3016 Sony 3014, 3047 Sprucer 3036 Standard Component 3033 Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041, 3067 Stargate 3026, 3041 Starquest 3026, 3041 Supercable 3008 Supermax 3045 Tele+1 3057, 3061 Telepiu 3057 Thomson 3000, 3009 TIME WARNER 3006 Tocom 3017 Torx 3067 Toshiba 3040 Tristar 3045 Tudi 3052 Tusa 3026, 3041 TV86 3031 Unika 3019, 3020 United Cable 3037, 3064 Universal 3019, 3020 Universum 3049, 3051 V2 3045 Videoway 3065 View Star 3024, 3029, 3031 Viewmaster Vision Visiopass Vortex View Wittenberg Zenith Zentek 3045 3045 3051, 3054, 3055 3045 3048 3035, 3040, 3046 3044 Sattelite AB Sat AccessHD ADB AGS Akai Alba 4138, 4139 4058 4142 4138 4101, 4103 4083, 4084, 4085, 4086, 4108, 4139 Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088 Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103 Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090 Alltech 4139 Alpha 4103 Alpha Digital 4058 Alphastar 4031 Amitronica 4139 Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136, 4139 Anglo 4139 Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090, 4139 Anttron 4083, 4086 Apollo 4083 Armstrong 4089, 4103 Artec 4054 Asat 4101, 4103 ASLF 4139 Astacom 4138 Astra 4089, 4091, 4100, 4137, 4139 Astro 4074, 4086, 4088, 4090, 4093, 4135, 4136, 4137 AudioTon 4086, 4098 Aurora 4140 Austar 4140 Axiel 4138 Axis 4074, 4090, 4091, 4096 Best 4074, 4090 Blaupunkt 4093 Blue Sky 4139 Boca 4089, 4100, 4105, 4139 Boston 4138 Brain Wave 4095 Broadcast 4094 Broco 4139 BSkyB 4113, 4123 BT 4138 Bubu Sat 4139 Bush 4084, 4127 Cambridge 4136 Canal Satellite 4135 Canal+ 4135 CaptiveWorks 4049 Channel Master 4060, 4085 Chaparral 4025 CHEROKEE 4138 Chess 4134, 4139 CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137 Clatronic 4095 CNT 4088 Comag 4000, 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004 Commlink 4087 Comtech 4096 Condor Connexions Conrad 4074, 4090, 4137 4074, 4092 4074, 4133, 4136, 4137 Conrad Electronic 4137, 4139 Contec 4096 Coolsat 4050 Cosat 4098 Coship 4063 Crown 4089 Daeryung 4092 Daewoo 4107, 4139 DDC 4085 Delega 4085 Dew 4096 Diamond 4097 Digiality 4137 Digital Stream 4059 DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020, 4021, 4022, 4024, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4041, 4043, 4045, 4057, 4106, 4143, 4144, 4145, 4146, 4147, 4148, 4149, 4150, 4151, 4152, 4153, 4154, 4155, 4156, 4157 Discoverer 4134 Discovery 4138 Diseqc 4138 Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013, 4014, 4019, 4039, 4064 Dishpro 4039, 4064 Distrisat 4103 Ditristrad 4098 DNT 4092, 4101, 4103 Drake 4026 DStv 4140 Dune 4074 Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039, 4064, 4092, 4139 Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089, 4136, 4139 Elap 4138, 4139 Elekta 4088 Elsat 4139 Elta 4074, 4083, 4090, 4098, 4101, 4103 Emanon 4083 Emme Esse 4074, 4090 Engel 4139 Ep Sat 4084 EURIEULT 4077 Eurodec 4102 Europa 4103, 4136, 4137 Europhon 4137 Eurosat 4089 Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090, 4133, 4136, 4137 Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137 Eutelsat 4139 Exator 4083, 4086 Expressvu 4039 Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139 Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132 Fidelity 4136 Finlandia 4084 Finlux 4084 FinnSat 4096, 4102 Flair Mate 4139 Foxtel 4140 Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136 FTEmaximal 4074, 4139 Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090, 4092, 4093, 4101, 4133 Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090, 4091, 4096, 4098, 4133, 4140 GE 4015, 4016, 4061, 4151 General Instrument 4027, 4065 GMI 4089 GOI 4039 Goldbox 4135 GoldStar 4099 Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084 Goodmind 4061 Grandin 4077 Grothusen 4083, 4099 Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093, 4113, 4129, 4136, 4140 Hänsel & Gretel 4137 Hantor 4083, 4095 Hanuri 4088 Hauppauge 4126 Heliocom 4137 Helium 4137 Hinari 4085 Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128, 4136, 4137, 4138 Hisawa 4095 Hisense 4066 Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149, 4153 Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007 Houston 4098 HTS 4039 Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144, 4146, 4150, 4152 Hughes Network Systems 4021 Humax 4051, 4075, 4076, 4110 Huth 4087, 4089, 4094, 4095, 4096, 4098, 4137, 4141 Hypson 4077 Ilo 4066 Imex 4077 Innovation 4090 Insignia 4057 Intertronic 4089 Intervision 4098, 4137 ITT Nokia 4084 Jerrold 4065 Johansson 4095 JOK 4138 JSR 4098 JVC 4011, 4019, 4039, 4079 Kamm 4139 Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103, 4109, 4112, 4120, 4133, 4138, 4139 Kathrein Eurostar 4133 Klap 4138 Konig 4137 Kosmos 4099 KR 4086 Kreiselmeyer 4093 K-SAT 4139 Kyostar 4083 L&S Electronic 4074 Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090, 4100, 4133, 4134, 4137 Lasonic 4062 Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099, 4133, 4137, 4139 Leng 4095 Lennox 4098 Lenson 4136 Lexus 4103 LG 4053, 4057, 4099 Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134, 4139 Lifetec 4090 Lorenzen 4137 Lorraine 4099 Lupus 4074, 4090 Luxor 4136 Lyonnaise 4102 Macab 4102 Magnavox 4045, 4055 Manata 4077, 4138, 4139 Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098, 4138 Marantz 4101 Mascom 4088 Maspro 4084, 4139 Matsui 4138 Max 4137 Mediabox 4135 Mediamarkt 4089 Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136 Medion 4074, 4090, 4139 Medison 4139 Mega 4101, 4103 Memorex 4045 Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083, 4086, 4087, 4088, 4139 Metz 4093 Micro electronic 4136, 4137, 4139 Micro Technology 4139 MicroGem 4056 Micromaxx 4074, 4090 Microstar 4090 Microtec 4139 Minerva 4093 Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152 Mitsumi 4100 Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101, 4103, 4139 Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010, 4065 Multichoice 4140 Multitec 4134 Muratto 4099 Mysat 4139 Navex 4095 Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136, 4137, 4139 Neusat 4139 Next Level 4065 NextWave 4141 Nikko 4089, 4139 Nokia 4084, 4122 Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085, 4088, 4102 Nova 4140 Novis 4095 Oceanic 4097 Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096 Okano 4089 Optex 4098 Optus 4135, 4140, 4141 viii Orbitech OSat Otto Versand Pace Pacific Packsat Palcom Palladium Palsat Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat PCT Philco Philips Phoenix Phonotrend Pioneer Polsat Predki Premiere Priesner Primestar Profile Promax Prosat Proscan Protek Proton Provision Quadral Quelle Quiero RadioShack Radiola Radix Rainbow RCA Realistic Redpoint Redstar RFT Roadstar Roch Rover Saba Sabre Sagem Sakura Samsung SAT Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team ix 4083, 4134, 4135, 4136 4086 4093 4084, 4093, 4113, 4121, 4125, 4138 4097 4138 4085 4089, 4136 4134, 4136 4140 4043, 4044, 4046, 4084, 4113, 4118, 4143, 4148 4084, 4137 4047 4138 4045 4060 4055 4021, 4022, 4045, 4084, 4101, 4103, 4111, 4115, 4135, 4138, 4150, 4152, 4153, 4155, 4156 4096 4084, 4087, 4098 4124, 4135 4102 4095 4098, 4135 4089 4030 4138 4084 4085, 4087 4015, 4016, 4040, 4151 4097 4066 4088 4074, 4085, 4087, 4090, 4138 4093, 4133, 4137 4102 4065 4101, 4103 4092, 4119 4086 4015, 4016, 4034, 4035, 4036, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4151, 4157 4028 4091 4074, 4090 4087, 4101, 4103 4139 4077 4074, 4139 4088, 4133, 4137, 4138 4084 4069, 4102 4096 4018, 4021, 4023, 4041, 4042, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4114, 4150, 4154 4085, 4136 4141 4083, 4086, 4088, 4095, 4099, 4136 4139 Satcom Satec Satelco Satford Satmaster Satplus Schneider Schwaiger SCS Seemann SEG 4094, 4137 4139 4074 4094 4094 4134 4090, 4134, 4138 4097, 4134, 4137 4133 4089, 4091, 4092 4074, 4083, 4090, 4095 Seleco 4098 Servi Sat 4077, 4139 Siemens 4093 Silva 4099 Skantin 4139 Skardin 4091 Skinsat 4136 SKR 4139 Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087, 4134, 4139 Skymax 4101, 4103 SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137, 4139 Skyvision 4098 SM Electronic 4134, 4139 Smart 4133, 4139 Sony 4017, 4020, 4135 SR 4089, 4100 Star Choice 4065 Starland 4139 Starring 4095 Start Trak 4083 Strong 4074, 4083, 4086, 4090, 4099, 4140 STS 4033 STVI 4077 Sumida 4089 Sunny Sound 4074 Sunsat 4139 Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100 Supermax 4141 Tandberg 4102 Tandy 4086 Tantec 4084 TCM 4090 Techniland 4094 TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073, 4092, 4103, 4116, 4117, 4134, 4135, 4136 Technology 4140 Technosat 4141 Technowelt 4137 Teco 4089, 4100 Telanor 4085 Telasat 4133, 4137 Telecom 4139 Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138 Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092, 4136, 4137 Telemaster 4088 Telesat 4137 Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136 Televes 4084, 4136 Telewire 4098 Tempo 4141 Tevion 4090, 4139 Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102, 4104, 4130, 4133, 4135, 4137, 4138, 4139 Thorens 4097 Thorn 4084 Tivax Tivo Tokai Tonna Toshiba Triad Triasat Triax Turnsat Tvonics Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat Unitor Universum US Digital Variosat Vega Ventana Viewsat Visiosat Voom Vortec Welltech WeTeKom Wevasat Wewa Winersat Wisi Woorisat Worldsat Xrypton XSat Zehnder Zenith Zodiac 4058 4150 4103 4084, 4094, 4098, 4136, 4139 4144, 4152, 4153 4099 4136 4093, 4133, 4136, 4139 4139 4132 4077, 4139 4140 4134 4020 4029, 4045 4089, 4096, 4103 4095 4093, 4133, 4137 4066 4093 4074 4101, 4103 4048 4095, 4098, 4138, 4139 4065 4083 4134 4134, 4136 4084 4084 4095 4084, 4092, 4093, 4136, 4137 4088 4138 4074 4139 4074, 4088, 4090, 4131, 4133 4052, 4057, 4145 4086 CD Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recoder Yamaha 5001 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 Tape Yamaha 5005, 5006 Tuner Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 USB Yamaha 5012, 5021 DOCK Yamaha 5011, 5022 LD Yamaha 2002 Information about software About FLAC codec library Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: – Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. – Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. – Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. About Vorbis library Copyright (c) 2001, Xiphophorus Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: – Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. – Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. – Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. x 00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM U HTR-6280 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Printed in Malaysia WR37660 U HTR-6280 The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual. ■ Front panel A BC D E F G H I J HDMI THROUGH VOLUME ZONE2 ON/OFF ZONE2 CONTROL INFO l MEMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY h l TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE PHONES TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC USB ON/OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA K L M N O P Q R S VIDEO AUDIO T U V ■ Remote control a n MAIN ZONE2 c CODE SET TRANSMIT b POWER SOURCE POWER SLEEP o p HDMI 1 2 3 4 4 q AV d 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX PHONO USB DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI PRESET TUN./CH AUDIO e CATEGORY FM AM f INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE g STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE h i BD DVD TV CD ON SCREEN j VOLUME ENTER s DISPLAY t TOP MENU MENU MUTE REC TAG l r OPTION RETURN k RADIO PRG SELECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 u v ENT TV INPUT m POWER TV VOL TV CH MUTE Printed in Malaysia WR37670-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-6280 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-6280 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha HTR-6280 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha HTR-6280 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha HTR-6280 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-6280 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha HTR-6280 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-6280 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-6280 Omistajan opas
- čeština: Yamaha HTR-6280 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-6280 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-6280 El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha HTR-6280 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha HTR-6280 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V3900 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-6260 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V671 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V863 de handleiding